PROJECT MANUAL FOR: CP170281 EAST CAMPUS PLANT...

PROJECT MANUAL FOR: CP170281 – EAST CAMPUS PLANT GROWTH FACILITIES COMPLEX PHASE 1 CP170282 – GENERAL SITE – EAST CAMPUS SITE UTILITY & INFRASTRUCTURE AT UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI COLUMBIA, MISSOURI FOR: THE CURATORS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI PREPARED BY: CANNON DESIGN 1100 CLARK AVENUE ST. LOUIS, MO 63102 DATE: July 24, 2017 VOLUME 2A OF 3

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

PROJECT MANUAL FOR: CP170281 – EAST CAMPUS PLANT GROWTH FACILITIES COMPLEX PHASE 1 CP170282 – GENERAL SITE – EAST CAMPUS SITE UTILITY & INFRASTRUCTURE

TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE PAGE VOLUME 1 – CP170281 – EAST CAMPUS PLANT GROWTH FACILITIES COMPLEX PHASE 1 CP170282 – GENERAL SITE – EAST CAMPUS SITE UTILITY & INFRASTRUCTURE DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Advertisement for Bids 1.A Bid for Lump Sum Contract 1.A 1-8 1.B Bidder's Statement of Qualifications BSQ/1-2 1.B.2 Supplier Diversity Compliance Evaluation SD 1-2 1.B.3 Application for Waiver SD 3-4 1.B.4 Affidavit for Affirmative Action SD 5-6 1.B.5 Certifying Supplier Diversity Agencies SD 7 1.B.6 Newspapers for Outreach to Diverse Suppliers SD 8 1.B.7 Affidavit of Supplier Diversity Participation SD 9 1.C Information for Bidders IFB/1-6 1.D General Conditions GC/1-46 1.E Special Conditions SC 1-14 1.E.1 Scheduling Specification SS 1-3 1.E.2 Roofing System Manufacturer's Certification RSMC1 1.E.3 Contractor’s Roofing/Flashing/Sheet Metal Guarantee CRFSMG 1-2 1.E.4 Shop Drawing and Submittal Log SDSL 1-40 1.E.5 Operating Instructions and Service Manual Log OMML 1-6 1.E.6 Closeout Log CLOSL 1-4 1.E.7 Commissioning Plan COM 1-30 1.E.8 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan SWPPP 1-32 1.F Index of Drawings INDEX 1-6 1.G Prevailing Wage Rates PW 1-14 1.H Alternates ALT 1 017329 Cutting and Patching 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 018113 Sustainable Design Requirements 018119 Indoor Air Quality

VOLUME 2A – CP170281 – EAST CAMPUS PLANT GROWTH FACILITIES COMPLEX PHASE 1 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 033540 Concrete Densifier-Sealer Treatment DIVISION 4 MASONRY 042000 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing 052100 Steel Joist Framing 053100 Steel Decking 054000 Cold Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055119 Metal Grating Stairs 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing 062013 Exterior Finish Carpentry 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 Thermal Insulation 072726 Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers 074113.16 Standing-Seam Metal Roof and Wall Panels 074210.41 Composite Framing Support System 074213.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 074213.19 Insulated Metal Wall Panels 074400 Faced Panels 075323 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 077100 Roof Specialties 077129 Manufactured Roof Expansion Joint 077200 Roof Accessories 077253 Snow Guards 078413 Penetration Firestopping 078443 Joint Firestopping 079100 Preformed Joint Seals 079200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081416 Flush Wood Doors 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing 088300 Mirrors 089119 Fixed Louvers DIVISION 9 FINISHES 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 092900 Gypsum Board 093013 Ceramic Tiling 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 099113 Exterior Painting

099123 Interior Painting 099600 High-Performance Coatings 099714 Thermal-Break Coating for Steel DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 102113.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets 105626 Mobile Storage Shelving DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 110140 Building Maintenance Equipment 111313 Loading Dock Bumpers 115313 Laboratory Fume Hoods 115319 Laboratory Equipment DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 123553.13 Laboratory Casework 123616 Metal Countertops DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 130383 Controlled Temperature Rooms 133413 Greenhouse and Greenhouse Related Equipment

VOLUME 2B – CP170281 – EAST CAMPUS PLANT GROWTH FACILITIES COMPLEX PHASE 1

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESION 210500 Basic Division 21 Requirements 210548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment 211000 Water-Based Fire Suppression Systems

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping 220519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 220523 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220700 Plumbing Insulation 221116 Domestic Water Piping 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 221123 Domestic Water Pumps 221316 Sanitary Waste, Vent and Storm Piping 221319 Sanitary Waste and Storm Piping Specialties 221429 Sump Pumps 223100 Domestic Water Softeners 223200 Domestic Water Filtration Equipment 223300 Electric domestic Water Heaters 224000 Plumbing Fixtures 226113 Compressed Air Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 230010 Basic Division 23 Requirements 230050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 230517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 230518 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping 230519 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 230523 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping (Short Form) 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230548 Vibration, Seismic and Wind Controls for HVAC 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230700 HVAC Insulation 230900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 232113 Hydronic Piping 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties 232123 Hydronic Pumps 232213 Steam and Condensate Heating Piping 232216 Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties 232500 HVAC Water Treatment 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 233416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans 233600 Air Terminal Units 233713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 233723 HVAC Gravity Ventilators 235700 Heat Exchangers for HVAC 237313 Modular Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units

VOLUME 2C – CP170281 – EAST CAMPUS PLANT GROWTH FACILITIES COMPLEX PHASE 1 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260010 Basic Division 26 Requirements 260505 Electrical Inspections and Testing 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (100-600 Volts) 260523 Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding 260529 Hangers and Supports 260533 Raceways 260535 Boxes and Cabinets 260543 Underground Ducts and Manholes 260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Raceways and Cabling 260548 Vibration and Seismic Controls 260553 Electrical Identification 260573 Protective Device Coordination 260575 Conduit Rough-In Systems 260578 Multi-Service Boxes and Assemblies 260590 Electrical Service Entrance 260800 Electrical Systems Commissioning 260923 Line Voltage Automatic Lighting Control Equipment 260924 Low Voltage Automatic Lighting Control Equipment 262413 Switchboards 262416 Panelboards 262485 Contactors 262726 Wiring Devices 262800 Protective Devices 262913 Variable Frequency Drives 264113 Lightning Protection System 264313 Surge Protection Devices for Low Voltage Electrical Power Circuits 265100 Interior Lighting 265600 Exterior Lighting DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 270528 Pathways for Communications Systems 270544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling 271011 Communications Scope of Work DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 284621 Addressable Fire Alarm Systems DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 311000 Site Clearing 312000 Earth Moving 312300 Excavation and Fill 316329 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321123 Aggregate Base Courses 321216 Asphalt Paving 321313 Concrete Paving 323100 Fences and Gates, Infill 323113 Chain Link Fences and Gates 337173.33 Electricity Metering

VOLUME 3 – CP170282 – GENERAL SITE – EAST CAMPUS SITE UTILITY & INFRASTRUCTURE DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260010 Basic Division 26 Requirements 260505 Electrical Inspections and Testing 260513 Medium Voltage Cable (601-35,000 Volts) 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (100-600 Volts) 260526 Grounding and Bonding 260529 Hangers and Supports 260533 Raceways 260535 Boxes and Cabinets 260543 Underground Ducts and Manholes 260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Raceways and Cabling 260553 Electrical Identification DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 311000 Site Clearing 312300 Excavation and Fill DIVISION 33 UTILITES 331116 Water Utility Distribution Piping 331429 Sump Pumps 333100 Sanitary Utility Drainage Piping 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping 336113 Hydronic Utility Distribution Piping 336313 Steam Energy Distribution Piping 336315 Steam Energy Distribution Piping Specialties 336317 Steam Energy Distribution Manual Valves 336319 Pipe Supports 336321 Steam Energy Thermal Distribution Thermal Insulation 336340 Steam Manholes and Structures 336344 Steam and Condensate Chase 336345 Precast Concrete Utility Structures – Lids 336350 Cast in Place Concrete for Utilities 336351 Concrete Requirements – Concrete Formwork 336352 Concrete Reinforcement 336354 General Concrete Requirements – Waterproofing

END OF SECTION

University of Missouri East Campus Plant Growth Facilities Complex Phase 1 – #CP170281 CannonDesign Project No. 005143.00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete Subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.



B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.

3. Laboratory Test Reports: For liquid floor treatments and curing and sealing compounds, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

F. Samples: For waterstops, vapor retarder.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, and testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Form materials and form-release agents.

4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

5. Waterstops.

6. Curing compounds.

7. Floor and slab treatments.

8. Bonding agents.

9. Adhesives.

10. Vapor retarders.

11. Semirigid joint filler.

12. Joint-filler strips.

13. Repair materials.

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=7





D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

E. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.

F. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

E. Mockups: Cast concrete formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build panel approximately 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

F. Provide as required in the RFQ for Material Testing and Inspection Services.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.



1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

2. ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed.

3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood.



B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

H. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 60 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from [ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420)] [ASTM A 706/A 706M], deformed bars, assembled with clips.

E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.

F. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M.

G. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.




B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Concrete shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from aggregates and cementitious materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

B. Regional Materials: Concrete shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II, gray.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.

3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.

4. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

E. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

G. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.




H. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems; MasterLife CI 222 (Pre-2014:

Rheocrete 222+). b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; DCI-S. c. Sika Corporation; FerroGard 901.

I. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Sika Greenstreak. b. Williams Products, Inc.

2. Profile: Flat dumbbell with center bulb, Ribbed with center bulb, and Ribbed without center bulb as indicated and as suits individual applications.

3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered.

B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BoMetals, Inc. b. Sika Greenstreak; Sika Greenstreak PVC Waterstop. c. Vinylex Waterstop & Accessories.

2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb or as indicated.

3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered.

C. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch (19 by 25 mm).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; MiraSTOP. b. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield Type 20. c. Sika Greenstreak; Swellstop.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=11006

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456999292















D. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer-modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch (10 by 19 mm).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc.; Adeka Ultra Seal MC-2005T. b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Adcor ES. c. Sika Greenstreak; Hydrotite.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Reef Industries, Inc; [Griffolyn 15 mil Green]. b. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A. c. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Perminator 15 mil.

2.8 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS

A. Slip-Resistive Emery Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive, crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials with 100 percent passing 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) sieve.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc; A-H Emery Non-Slip. b. Dayton Superior; Emery Non-Slip. c. Metalcrete Industries; Met-Top E.

B. Slip-Resistive Aluminum Granule Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of not less than 95 percent fused aluminum-oxide granules.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc; A-H Alox. b. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems; MasterTop 120 SR (Pre-2014: Frictex

NS). c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc; Grip It AO.

C. Emery Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Pigmented, factory-packaged, dry combination of portland cement, graded emery aggregate, and plasticizing admixture; with emery aggregate consisting of no less than 60 percent of total aggregate content.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:




















a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems; Confilm. b. Dayton Superior; AquaFilm Concentrate J74. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Eucobar.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems; MasterKure CC 160 WB (Pre-2014:

Kure N Seal WB). b. Dayton Superior; Clear Cure VOC J7WB. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Kurez DR VOX.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 1315 EF. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear VOX.

2. Products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 according to ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types I and II, nonload bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.















2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

3. Slag Cement: 25 percent.

4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 25 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

5. Silica Fume: 10 percent.

6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.

7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.



C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

B. Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete.



3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).


C. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.



3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. (309 kg/cu. m).

4. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.



D. Concrete Toppings: Normal-weight concrete.


2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. (320 kg/cu. m).

3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished toppings to exceed 3 percent.

E. Building Walls: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) [As indicated] at 28 days.


3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture <Insert dimension>, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).


2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.



G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.



3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair bituminous vapor retarder according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.

G. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material according to ASTM A 780/A 780M. Use galvanized-steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel reinforcement.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.



B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.

3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls [as indicated] <Insert spacing>. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.



3.8 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.



3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated, to receive concrete floor toppings, and to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.



C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to receive trowel finish, and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated, exposed to view, or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.

3. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)].

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated, and where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. (12 kg/10 sq. m) of dampened slip-resistive aggregate or aluminum granules over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface.

2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish.

3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to expose slip-resistive aggregate or aluminum granules.



3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches (100 mm) high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.


4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate.

6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.



E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to

receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.14 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least [one] [six] month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.



C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.



7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections: Provide as required in the RFQ for Material Testing and Inspection Services.

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Headed bolts and studs.

4. Verification of use of required design mixture.

5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for

each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.



5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens

at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set

of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 24 hours of finishing.

END OF SECTION 033000



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

University of Missouri East Campus Plant Growth Facilities Complex Phase 1 - #CP170281 CannonDesign Project No. 005143.00

CONCRETE DENSIFIER/SEALER TREATMENT 033540 - 1

SECTION 033540 - CONCRETE DENSIFIER/SEALER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Densifying, sealing, and hardening treatment for concrete floors.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct a pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer’s installation instructions, manufacturer’s warranty requirements, and following items.

1. Surface preparation. 2. Repair of defects and defective work prior to installation. 3. Cleaning. 4. Application of liquid hardener, densifier. 5. Protection of finished surfaces after installation.


A. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s product sheet, for specified products, including, but not limited to, application instructions and indication of VOC content.


A. Manufacturer Certification: Provide letter of acceptance from manufacturer of chemical hardener, prior to application of product to areas with sealer or membrane curing agent applied.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Warranty: Submit warranty documents specified in this Section.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

1. Manufacturer’s instructions on maintenance renewal of applied treatments.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain densifier, hardener and sealer through one source from single manufacturer.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging with identification labels and seals intact.

B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. Protect concrete slab prior to and after finishing.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Warrant installation for a period of 10 years from date of Substantial Completion against dusting from abrasion.


CONCRETE DENSIFIER/SEALER TREATMENT 033540 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LITHIUM SILICONATE DENSIFIER/SEALER TREATMENT

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide L & M Construction Chemicals, LION HARD by Laticrete International, Inc. or comparable product.

B. Description: 100 percent active lithium silicate ingredient chemicals that penetrate concrete to seal, densify and harden to resist water and oil penetration, and contamination.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ensure surfaces are clean and free of all contaminants, and any film forming curing compounds or sealers.

B. Prepare surfaces to receive densifier/sealer treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Protect concrete from staining by other construction activity.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Comply with densifier/sealer treatment manufacturer’s written application instructions and recommendations.

B. Apply number of coats and at application rate recommended by densifier/sealer treatment manufacturer using recommended equipment. Remove excess material and allow application to dry and cure as recommended by densifier/sealer treatment manufacturer for applications shown on Drawings.

C. Remove excess materials and packaging and leave area broom clean.



UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).

a. Load-bearing and non-load-bearing CMUs

2. Brick units.

a. Clay face brick.

3. Mortar and grout materials. 4. Reinforcement.

a. Steel reinforcing bars. b. Masonry joint reinforcement.

5. Ties and anchors. 6. Embedded flashing materials. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:

1. Steel lintels in unit masonry. 2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).




A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.



C. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Exposed concrete masonry units. 2. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 3. Special brick shapes.



4. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within

specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area

compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 3. Mortar admixtures. 4. Preblended dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Reinforcing bars. 7. Joint reinforcement. 8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Plant-Mix Mortar: Include test reports, per ASTM C 1072, for plant-mix mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.

2. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109 / C 209M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 / C91M, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

3. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for [each type of exposed unit masonry construction] [typical exterior wall] [typical interior wall] [typical exterior and interior walls] in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness.

2. Build sample panels facing south. 3. Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels adjacent and parallel to existing

surface. 4. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 5. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.



6. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.

a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where 1 wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,

secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three (3) days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.



E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry and will be within 20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)

A. Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated:

1. Provide all special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide square-edged or bullnose units for outside corners, or as indicated on Drawings.

C. Load-Bearing and Non-Load-Bearing CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi.

2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Face): 7-5/8-inches by 15-5/8-inches. 4. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimension 3/8-inch less than nominal dimension. 5. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer’s standard color and texture suitable for paint

finish.

2.4 BRICK

A. Regional Materials: Brick shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.



B. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where:

a. Stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.

b. Requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

c. Shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

C. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Basis-of-Design Brick: Glen-Gery Brick; Classic Red Modular (to match existing East Campus Chiller Plant). Equivalent brick types must be submitted to the Architect and Owner for review prior to bidding.

2. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 3. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Construction Products; Trimix-NCA.

G. Water: Potable.



2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

1. Products:: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet.

D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder with single pair of side rods.

E. Reinforcement Fabrication: Fabricate bars used in masonry reinforcement in accordance with the fabricating tolerances of ACI 315.

1. Unless otherwise required, bend bars cold; do not heat bars. 2. Minimum Inside Diameter of Bend for Stirrups: 5 bar diameters.

a. Do not bend Grade 40 bars in excess of 180 degrees.

3. Minimum Inside Bend Diameter for Other Bars:

a. No. 3 through No. 8 (M#10 through 25): 6 bar diameters. b. No. 9 through No. 11 (M#29 through 36): 8 bar diameters.

4. Provide standard hooks that conform to the following:

a. 180-Degree Hook: 180-degree bend plus minimum extension of 4 bar diameters or 2-1/2 inches whichever is greater.

b. 135-Degree Hook: 135 –Ódegree bend plus minimum extension of 6 bar diameters or 4 inches whichever is greater.

c. 90-Degree Hook: 90-degree bend plus minimum extension of 12 bar diameters. d. For stirrups: a 90 degree or 135 degree bend plus a minimum of 6 bar diameters

or 2-1/2 in. whichever is greater.

5. Fabricate joint reinforcement, anchors, and ties in accordance with requirements specified in this Section and with published specifications of accepted manufacturer.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.



B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete [or Existing Concrete Masonry Units]: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Connector Section - Provide either of the following:

a. Screw-Attached Masonry-Veneer Anchor for Concrete: Screw with alternating threads, sealing washer and flanged head with eye for wire tie, designed for insertion into concrete in pre-drilled holes. Provide barrel length to match thickness of insulation.

1) Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Thermal 2-Seal Wing Nut Anchor.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

D. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Hohmann and Barnard; PTA 420.

E. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows:

a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.

2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; Pos-I-Tie. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; 2-Seal Tie with Byna-Lok Wire Tie. 3) Wire-Bond; SureTie.

b. Anchor Section: Zinc-alloy barrel section with flanged head with eye and corrosion-resistant, self-drilling screw. Eye designed to receive wire tie and to serve as head for drilling fastener into framing. Barrel length to suit insulation and sheathing thickness.

c. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.



3. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Stainless Steel SX Fastener.

2) ITW Buildex; Scots long life Teks.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual " and as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick.

B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Stainless Steel Flashing: Type 304 stainless steel bonded to a layer of polymeric fabric. Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash SS.

C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:

1. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

E. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless-steel sheet 0.019 inch by 1-1/2 inches with a 3/8 inch sealant flange at top.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Vent Products: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.


a. Mortar Net Solutions; WeepVent.



E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.

1. Provide one of the following configurations:

a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings.


a. Mortar Net Solutions; Mortar Net.

2.10 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, NFPA 285 tested.


a. Atlas Roofing Corporation; EnergyShield CGF Pro

b. Firestone Building Products; Enverge CI Glass c. Hunter Panels; Hunter Xci CG

B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated.

2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. EaCo Chem, Inc. b. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use Portland cement-lime mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 2. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S.



D. Plant-Mix Mortar: Proportion mortar to comply with required type per ASTM C 270 and provide minimum 75 psi flexural bond strength of when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1072 with prism constructed utilizing the proposed mortar mix.

1. If specified bond strength cannot be obtained by adjusting mortar mix within specified range of the mortar type specified, immediately notify the Architect and provide recommendations.

2. Conduct separate tests for each brick and separate tests utilizing different brick or other masonry units as combination occurs on the job.

3. Dry mix materials utilizing equipment designed to insure uniform blending and precision measuring devices to insure uniformity from batch to batch.

4. Deliver and maintain at site bulk dry blended ingredients in enclosed container. 5. Add only clean water at the site.

E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to

ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.



F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements - Maximum Variation:

1. Dimensions in Cross Section or Elevation: Plus 1/2-inch or minus 1/4-inch. 2. Location of Elements in Plan - From That Indicated: Plus or minus 1/2-inch or plus

3/4-inch maximum. 3. Location of Elements in Elevation - From That Indicated: Plus or minus 1/4-inch in a story

height or 3/4-inch total. 4. Grout Space or Cavity Width: Plus 3/8-inch or minus 1/4-inch.

B. Lines and Levels - Maximum Variation:

1. Bed Joints and Top Surfaces of Bearing Walls - From Level: 1/4-inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. Conspicuous Horizontal Lines (such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals) From Level: 1/8-inch in 10 feet, 1/4-inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. Vertical Lines and Surfaces - From Plumb: 1/4-inch in 10 feet, 3/8-inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. Conspicuous Vertical Lines (such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints) - From Plumb: 1/8-inch in 10 feet, 1/4-inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. Lines and Surfaces - From Straight: 1/4-inch in 10 feet, 3/8-inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

6. Vertical Alignment of Exposed Head Joints - From Plumb: 1/4-inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

7. Faces of Adjacent Exposed Masonry Units - From Flush Alignment: 1/16-inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

8. Alignment of Columns and Walls (Bottom Versus Top): 1/2-inch for bearing walls and 3/4-inch for non-bearing walls.

C. Joints - Maximum Variation:

1. Bed Joints - From Thickness Indicated: Plus or minus 1/8-inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2-inch.

2. Exposed Bed Joints - From Bed-Joint Thickness of Adjacent Courses: 1/8-inch. 3. Head and Collar Joints - From Thickness Indicated: Plus 3/8-inch or minus 1/4-inch. 4. Exposed Head Joints - From Thickness Indicated: Plus or minus 1/8-inch. Do not vary

from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8-inch. 5. Exposed Bed Joints and Head Joints of Stacked Bond - From a Straight Line: 1/16-inch

from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.



C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick and CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells fully in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs fully in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs fully in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, in mortar at starting course on footings

where cells are not grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed

anchors and ties in mortar. 6. Where hollow units are used to infill openings, remove existing unit and tooth in new units

to maintain continuity of coursing.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive cavity wall insulation and air barriersunless otherwise indicated.

3.6 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing andto concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and

down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and horizontally.

Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 24 inches, around perimeter.



B. Provide not less than 1 inch of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of insulation.

1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.

3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement where continuous reinforcement is indicated.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.

Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is

complete for application of sealant.

C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 2. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch

for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200"Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch.

3.9 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated. Refer to Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels.

3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.



B. Flashing: Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations and joints in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of substrate at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under water-resistive barrier lapping at least 4 inches. Fasten upper edge of flexible flashing to sheathing through termination bar.

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.

4. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height, unless otherwise specified.

a. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.

2. Grout Placement:

a. Placing Time: Place grout within 1-1/2 hours from introducing water in the mixture and prior to initial set.

b. Confinement: Confine grout to areas indicated on Drawings using materials the permit bond between unit masonry and mortar.



3. Consolidation: Consolidate grout at time of placement.

a. Consolidate grout pours that are 12 inches or less in height by mechanical vibration or puddling.

b. Consolidate grout pours that exceed 12 inches in height by mechanical vibration and reconsolidate by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred.


A. Testing and Inspecting:

1. Owner will engage qualified, independent special inspectors and testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

2. Refer to "Testing Agency Qualifications" in "Quality Assurance" article in Part 1 - General above for testing agency requirements.

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. 3. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

C. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Testing Prior to Construction: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength.

2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, provide the following testing:

a. For compliance with ASTM C 270, test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength.

b. For comparison with Field Quality Control Testing specified in Part 3 below, test according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength.

4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. 5. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.

F. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

G. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.



H. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

I. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.

3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. Air Barriers: Repair any damage to air barriers resulting from masonry construction at no additional cost to Owner in compliance with following requirements:

1. Seal penetrations in air barrier created by screws or other fasteners used to secure veneer in accordance with recommendations of air barrier manufacturer and as directed by air barrier installer. Provide all repair work necessary and as required to ensure continuance of applicable warranties for the air barrier.

2. Seal holes or tears in air barrier resulting from masonry construction in accordance with the instructions and recommendations of air barrier installer and air barrier manufacturer. Provide all repair work necessary and as required to ensure continuance of applicable warranties for the air barrier.

3. Test repairs to air barrier for air tightness and water tightness to ensure repaired air barrier complies with requirements specified in applicable air barrier technical sections. Submit field test reports to Architect.

a. Repeat testing and additional repair efforts until testing results are acceptable and demonstrate compliance with specified requirements for air barrier. Do not proceed with additional masonry construction until repair and testing of repaired air barrier demonstrate compliance with specified air barrier requirements.

4. Prior to beginning masonry construction, obtain inspection by air barrier manufacturer of proposed construction and field conditions and obtain letter of acceptance from air barrier manufacturer, submitting copy of letter to Architect.

D. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

E. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean masonry with a proprietary cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.



3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel.

3. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface-preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections.

C. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings. 1. All bent moment frames located in the headhouse require demand critical welds of

column to beam and beam to beam connections. These occur for the entire west length of the complex unless specifically noted otherwise on plans.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.





B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled

content and cost.




C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

5. Identify members and connections of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Structural-steel connection analysis and signed and sealed calculations are required to

be completed and submitted prior to structural steel shop drawing submittal. Structural steel shop drawings are considered incomplete without prior submittal of sealed connection designs. Information included in the sealed connection submittal are required to be incorporated in the steel shop drawings for the steel shop drawings to be considered complete.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency.


C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

D. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shop primers. 5. Nonshrink grout.

E. Survey of existing conditions.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds

shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.



D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes

repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Allowable Strength Design; data are given at service-load level.

B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.

C. Construction: Combined system of Special Concentrically Braced Frames and Intermediate Moment Frames.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 (345).

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade “B” or “C”, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: Standard unless indicated otherwise. 2. Finish: Galvanized.

F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11.

G. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M.

H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.



2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8),

compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 959M, Type 10.9),

compressible-washer type with plain finish.

C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, [heavy-hex] [round] head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: [Plain] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating].

D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, or Grade 36 ASTM F 1554. 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain.

F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 ASTM F 1554, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain.

G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345). 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain.

H. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

2.4 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type II, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer.

E. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.



2.5 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill,or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes

or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened and Slip critical.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Galvanized surfaces. 5. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.



B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 4. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning." 5. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or

erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

2.9 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as

weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize lintels, shelf angles, and welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame

and located in exterior walls.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being

fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree

flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear

connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. Provide as required in the RFQ for Material Testing and Inspection Services.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods,

bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-

place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened and Slip critical.



B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary

connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Special Inspections:

B. Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections according to the Quality Control and Quality Assurance chapters of the AISC 360-10 and AISC 303-10 including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

C. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

D. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

E. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

F. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree

flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear

connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

G. Provide as required in the RFQ for Material Testing and Inspection Service.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool

cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



D. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."



STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 1

SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. LH-series long-span steel joists.

2. Joist accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."

B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications."


A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.

2. Include joining and anchorage details; bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and professional engineer.


C. Manufacturer certificates.

D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.

E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation.

F. Field quality-control reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications."

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Provide as required in the RFQ for Material Testing Inspection Services.




A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc.

2. CMC Joist & Deck.

3. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.

4. Vulcraft; Nucor Vulcraft Group.


A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated.

1. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.

2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than the following: a. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.

2.3 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specification for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as follows:]

1. Joist Type: LH-series steel joists.

2. End Arrangement: Underslung with extended ends where required for architectural finishes.

3. Top-Chord Arrangement: Parallel.

B. Camber long-span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications."

C. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primer: Provide shop primer that complies with Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Schematically indicated on drawings only. Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.

B. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated.

1. Finish: Plain.








C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

F. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly.

2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories.

C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.

2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.

3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction.

4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads are applied.

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.

E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.




A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections according to the Quality Control and Quality Assurance chapter of the AISC 360-10.

1. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

2. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165/E 165M. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709. c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164.

3. Visually inspect bolted connections.

4. Visually inspect joist bridging, including both horizontal and diagonal.

5. Prepare test and inspection reports.

B. Provide as required in the RFQ for Material Testing and Inspection Services.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, abutting structural steel, and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Roof deck.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel

shapes. 2. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting

of deck. 3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of

deck.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,

cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck, from ICC-ES.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.

D. Provide as required in the RFQ for Material Testing and Inspection Services


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to

maintain insulation free of moisture.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of

another qualified testing agency.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 2. CMC Joist & Deck. 3. Nucor Corp.

B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230),

G90 (Z275) zinc coating. 2. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS),

Grade 33 (230), G90 (Z275) zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Deck Profile: Type NR, narrow rib. 4. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0474 inch (1.20 mm). 6. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 7. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

G. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.







H. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide flanges and [level] [sloped] recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.

I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

J. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Fasten deck in a 36/7 pattern. Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units at

6”oc. and as indicated.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 18 inches (457 mm), and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel

screws. 2. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum.



D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one weld at each corner. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld.

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.

F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

D. Provide as required in the RFQ for Material Testing and Inspection Services

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of

deck exposed to view. 2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in

Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Soffit framing. 3. Interior headers and supports as indicated. 4. Exterior load bearing roof overframing.


A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. LEED Submittal:


C. Shop Drawings:

1. Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

3. Show all adjoining work and how the loads and fastening requirements of the adjoining work are accommodated by the cold formed metal framing.

4. Provisions for adjustment of anchors relative to tolerances of building structure. 5. Provisions for accommodating design building and thermal movements.

D. Coordination Drawings: Provide drawings which indicate that all trades which require cold formed metal framing backup or penetrations through framing assemblies have coordinated with other contractors.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: Cold-formed metal framing is indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation registered and licensed in the State where the project is being built.

1. Include individual cladding loads and deflections of exterior skin components in calculations.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer testing agency.

C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products:

1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners.



5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing, from ICC-ES.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code-Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel."


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling in accordance with AISI's Code of Standard Practice.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation in accordance with AISI's Code of Standard Practice.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following:

1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 2. MarinoWare. 3. MBA Building Supplies.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" and as follows to design cold-formed steel framing.

1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

2. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated on the structural drawings.

a. Dead Loads: Weights of materials and construction. b. Live Loads: As indicated on the structural drawings. c. Wind Loads: Component and cladding wind loading shall be determined based

on the Wind Design Criteria on the Structural Drawings.



d. Seismic Loads: As indicated on the structural drawings.

2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:

a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing:

1) Framing supporting brick veneer shall be limited to L/600. 2) Framing supporting other materials shall be as recommended by the

product’s manufacturer, not to exceed a limit or L/360.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 3/8 inch.

5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

2. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI S100 "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and AISI S200 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90 or equivalent.

C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:



1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90 or equivalent.

2.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by structural performance but not less than 0.0538 inch.

2. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings, or as required to meet performance requirements and dimensional constraints indicated on Drawings.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:



C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:



D. Steel Double-L Headers: Manufacturer's standard L-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, and as follows:


2. Top Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings, or as required to meet performance requirements and dimensional constraints indicated on Drawings.

2.5 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING (INTERIOR WHERE INDICATED)

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:



B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:



C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.




a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MarinoWare. c. MBA Building Supplies

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:


2. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for 1-story structures and 1 inch plus twice the design gap for other applications.

E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by structural performance but not less than 0.0538 inch.

b. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for 1-story structures and 1 inch plus twice the design gap for other applications.

2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by structural performance but not less than 0.0538 inch.

b. Flange Width: equal to sum of outer deflection track flange width plus 1 inch.

F. Slotted Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg U-shaped steel track; punched with vertical slots in both legs. Studs should be positively attached to deep-leg track using vertical slots while allowing free vertical movement. Legs designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure.

1. Standard Leg: 2-1/2 inches. 2. Standard Vertical Slot Length: 1-1/2 inches. 3. Minimum Yield Strength and Thickness: As required by structural performance but not

less than 50 ksi; 0.0538 inch.

G. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.

2.6 SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:


2. Flange Width: 2 inches, minimum.



2.7 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 9. Backer plates.

2.8 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Not allowed.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.



2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.



C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks.

1. Stud Spacing: as required by design but not more than 16 inches.

B. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

C. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

D. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.



E. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

F. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

G. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads.

H. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

I. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

J. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.5 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION (INTERIOR WHERE INDICATED)

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: as required by design but not more than 16 inches.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 18 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.



3.6 SOFFIT INSTALLATION

A. Install perimeter soffit track sized to match other members. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Frame openings with built-up headers consisting of framing members and track, nesting members, or another combination of connected members if indicated.

C. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each intersection as follows:

1. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.

D. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable soffit-framing assembly.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.

2. Miscellaneous trim. 3. Metal ladders. 4. Ladder safety cages.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into

concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. 4. Miscellaneous aluminum trim pieces.

1.2 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. LEED Submittals:


C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3. For products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data

signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

4. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

a. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.

b. Metal ladders. c. Ladder safety cages.



d. Miscellaneous steel and aluminum trim indicated.. e. Loose steel lintels.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.

H. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

I. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.



1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1.

D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

F. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

G. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).

H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).

I. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

J. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.



D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

1. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.

2.7 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Lintel Schedule: Furnish lintels for installation in Division 04 sections not furnished in Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing". Provide quantity and sizes indicated on Drawings or as indicated below if not indicated on Drawings.

1. Where lintels occur in exterior wall assemblies, provide minimum lintel thickness of 5/16-inch.

2. Set lintels with long leg vertical and with 8-inches of bearing each end.



2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from aluminum shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

C. Paint miscellaneous aluminum trim.

2.9 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 1-inch- diameter steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or

bolted steel brackets. 6. Galvanize ladders, including brackets.

2.10 LADDER SAFETY CAGES

A. General:

1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners.

2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches o.c. between primary hoops.

3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages:

1. Primary Hoops: 1/4-by-4-inch flat bar hoops. 2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4-by-2-inch flat bar hoops. 3. Vertical Bars: 3/16-by-1-1/2-inch flat bars secured to each hoop. 4. Galvanize ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners.

2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:



1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. 3. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

2.13 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.



C. Where installing sill trim, provide end dams to prevent the flow of water into the cavity wall. Provide continuous trim, do not field splice sill or head pieces.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



METAL GRATING STAIRS 055119 - 1

SECTION 055119 - METAL GRATING STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes industrial-type, straight-run stairs with steel-grating treads and railings attached to metal grating stairs.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For metal grating stairs and the following:

1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition

to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360.



C. Seismic Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

E. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.

F. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to be galvanized.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.



B. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

C. Weld connections to comply with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint

Finish Standards" for Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter.

D. Fabricate joints that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Industrial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements.

C. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."

1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded steel grating with openings in gratings no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.

2. Surface: Serrated. 3. Finish: Galvanized. 4. Fabricate grating treads with rolled-steel floor checker plate nosing and with steel angle

or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts.

5. Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads. Provide toeplates at open-sided edges of grating platforms. Weld grating to platform framing.

2.7 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings."

1. Fabricate newels of square steel tubing and provide newel caps of pressed steel, as shown.

2. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.



2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates.

B. Set steel-stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.


A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting,"Section 099123 "Interior Painting,"and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1

SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe and tube railings.

1.2 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. LEED Submittals:


C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m).

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C, material surfaces).

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage and that provides 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2.4 STEEL AND IRON

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:



1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.

3. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.

2. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

1. For railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting,"Section 099123 "Interior Painting,"and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.



C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

H. Form Changes in Direction as Follows:

1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

I. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

J. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

K. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.

L. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

M. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion. 3. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain

as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m).

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post.

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to railing ends.



B. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

C. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.

2. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements.


A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.



MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Roof edge support blocking. 3. Wood blocking and nailers. 4. Plywood backing panels.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

2. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.



2. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs. 3. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor. 4. Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: For roof edge support blocking, including the following:

1. Plans, details and attachments to other work. 2. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of

expansion and contraction. 3. Layout of fasteners, fastener types and other attachments necessary to meet

performance requirements. 4. Details of special conditions.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal - Roof Edge Support Blocking: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.





A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 2. Post-installed anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

C. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Roof Edge Support Blocking: Provide roof edge support blocking that withstands exposure to weather and induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install wood blocking for roof-edge specialties listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90.

2. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Design and install wood blocking for copings and roof edges capable of resisting the following design pressures:

a. Design Pressure: Refer to Division 07 Section "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing".

3. Delegated Design: Design of supporting wood blocking for copings and roof edges, including comprehensive engineering analysis by qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Regional Materials: Dimension lumber shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B. Certified Wood: Lumber and plywood shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.



C. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on

end or back of each piece. 3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for

fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers.



3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Roof edge support blocking.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fastenersof Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC58 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.



F. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions.

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c.

G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Roof Edge Support Blocking: Construct and install roof blocking for copings and roof edges in accordance with shop drawings and to meet performance requirements specified in this Section.



SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wall and soffit sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials.

2. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516.

3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs. 2. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor. 3. Product Data: For installation adhesives, indicating VOC content.


A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:

1. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

C. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD-01-001 and FSC STD-40-004.

1. Plywood.

B. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 WALL AND SOFFIT SHEATHING

A. Plywood Wall and Soffit Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.



B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing (all locations unless plywood is indicated): ASTM C 1177/1177M.


a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP. d. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.

2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

C. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C

954.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Unless otherwise indicated, install sheathing products in accordance with sheathing product manufacturer’s recommendations for applications indicated on Drawings.

B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

C. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

D. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.



F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might

retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.

C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.

D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.



EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 1

SECTION 062013 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Lumber siding and soffits.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details.

1. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified.


1. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products, with half of exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.


A. Compliance Certificates:

1. For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp. 2. For fire-retardant-treated wood that is not marked with classification marking of testing

and inspecting agency.


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.

1. For exterior ornamental wood columns, comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.



2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Regional Materials: The following wood products shall be manufactured within 100 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 100 miles of Project site.

1. Exterior lumber siding and soffits.

B. Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001 and FSC STD-40-004.

1. Exterior lumber siding and soffits.

C. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated.

D. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency, indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.

E. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: For applications indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and comply with testing requirements; testing will be conducted by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Exterior Type: Materials shall comply with testing requirements after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898.

2. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively.

C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not contain colorants, and provide materials that do not have marks from spacer sticks on exposed face.

D. Do not use material that does not comply with requirements for untreated material or is warped or discolored.

E. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

F. Application: All exterior lumber and plywood.




2.3 LUMBER SIDING AND SOFFITS

A. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20.

B. Species and Grade: Grade A (Clear) western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

C. Pattern: V-edge, smooth-faced tongue and groove, actual face width (coverage) and thickness of 3 inch by 3/4 inch.

2.4 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Finish architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Transparent Finish:

1. Stain: None. 2. First and Second Coat: Oil based water-repellant preservative (1 percent or less of wax

by volume and content). 3. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.


A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate.

1. For face-fastening siding, provide ringed-shank siding nails or hot-dip galvanized-steel siding nails.

2. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, provide stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches , except members with ends exposed in finished work.

B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.


A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.



1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.

3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry.

3.4 SIDING AND SOFFIT INSTALLATION

A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Horizontal Lumber Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first course of siding, with lower edge at least 1/8 inch below starter strip and subsequent courses lapped 1 inch over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding.

1. Leave 1/8-inch gap at trim and corners unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, and apply sealant.

2. Butt joints only over framing or blocking, nailing top and bottom on each side and staggering joints in subsequent courses.

C. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding manufacturer.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.

B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1

SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior architectural woodwork items including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. b. Solid surfacing countertops, including backsplashes, end splashes, and sinks. c. Stainless steel faced wall panels.

2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural wood cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

3. Shop finishing of interior architectural woodwork.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior Architectural Woodwork: Includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation and includes items referred to as "millwork."

B. AWI: Architectural Woodwork Institute.




A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate, countertop materials, sinks, and cabinet hardware and accessories.


1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled content and cost.


3. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs. 4. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. 5. Product Data: For composite wood products, indicating that product contains no urea

formaldehyde.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and other

items installed in interior architectural woodwork items including countertops. 4. For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge profiles, and backsplash profiles,

methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

a. Show locations and details of joints.



b. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

5. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

6. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic Laminates for Cabinets: 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.

2. Wood-Grain Plastic Laminates for Cabinets: 12 by 24 inches, for each type, pattern and surface finish.

3. Thermoset Decorative Panels: 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on one edge.

4. Countertops:

a. Countertop material, 6 inches square.


A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Maintenance Manual Data for Solid Surfacing Countertops: Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products and/or Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.


A. Do not deliver interior architectural woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.



C. Field Measurements: Where interior architectural woodwork items are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support interior architectural woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete.

D. Established Dimensions: Where interior architectural woodwork items are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that countertops can be supported and installed as indicated.

1. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 2" published by AWI for grades of architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Grade: Custom.

B. Type of Construction: Frameless.

C. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay .

D. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in Finish Schedule or Finish Legend on Drawings.

F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and

finish.



4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

G. Materials for Semi-Exposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semi-exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding.

3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

H. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

I. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

J. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

K. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.

2.3 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.

1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in Finish Schedule or Finish Legend on Drawings.

2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with CSA B45.5/IAPMO Z124.

a. Basis of Design product; Corian 810 bowl with offset overflow, glacier white, or Architect approved equivalent.

4. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish Legend.

B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, and touch sanded.

2.4 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Wood products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.



C. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde.

2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay. 3. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.5 METAL MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

2.6 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing; equivalent to following:

1. Blumm No. 71 6580 with Plate 173H9100 2. Grass No. 3903VZ with mounting plate 10761 3. Hafele No. 329.07.654 with plate

B. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, BHMA A156.9, B02011 solid brass, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter; equivalent to the following:

1. 4484 by Stanley Hardware. 2. MC-4024 by Epco Hardware. 3. No. 6208 by National Lock and Cabinet Hardware.

C. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

D. Counter Support Brackets:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Rakks Counter Support Bracket, EH Series" by the Rangine Corporation or acceptable comparable product.

2. Configuration: Flush mounted. 3. Material: ASTM B221, 6063 T5, horizontal T-shape and vertical L-shape extruded

aluminum bracket with MIG welding across 45-degree miters and back. 4. Load Capacity: 450 pounds per bracket minimum. 5. Faceplates: 4-inch by 4-inch aluminum faceplates with adhesive backing, notched to fit

around vertical flange of flush mounted counter support bracket, to conceal penetration through gypsum board.

6. Finish: Custom powder coat finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05111; Side-mounted, full-extension, all ball bearing zinc-plated steel drawer slides with hold-in detent rated for indicated loads, and equivalent to the following:

1. Drawers 6-inches or less in depth and up to 16-inches in width:

a. Model 3832SC, 100 lb./pr. (45kg) load rating, telescoping, self-closing movement, by Accuride International, or approved equal.



2. Drawers 6-inches or less in depth and up to 24-inches in width:

a. Model 7432, 100 lb./pr. (45kg) load rating, progressive movement, by Accuride International, or approved equal.

3. Drawers over 6-inches in depth and up to 42-inches in width:

a. Model 3640, 200lb./pr. (90 kg) load rating, sequential movement, by Accuride International, or approved equal.

F. Door and Drawer Locks:

1. Door and Drawer Locks: Multi-function pin tumbler cam locks suitable for specific project applications. All brass construction with 26D-Dull Chrome finish, equivalent to "No. C8103 by National Lock Co.," or approved equal. Provide two stamped brass keys per lock. Locks to be capable of 850 key changes.

G. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

H. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG Series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.

I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Solid-Surfacing Countertops: Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Configuration:

a. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. b. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. c. End Splash: Matching backsplash.



3. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material . 4. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid

surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

a. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. b. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop.

5. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

6. Cutouts and Holes:

a. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures [in shop] using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

1) Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening.

2) Provide 3/4-inch full bullnose edges projecting 3/8 inch into fixture opening.

b. Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.

c. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.

C. Stainless Steel Wall Panels: Fabricate metal wall panels with 1/16 inch stainless steel laminated, front and back, to 3/4 inch plywood sheet.

1. Stainless Steel Finish: Bright, Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install interior architectural woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed.



B. Cabinets:

1. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

2. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

3. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

4. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

a. For shop finished items use filler matching finish of items being installed.

5. Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

a. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

b. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. c. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more

than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish,.

C. Solid Surfacing Countertops

1. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

2. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

3. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

4. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

5. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

6. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.

7. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

a. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.

8. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."




A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Board insulation.

a. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board.

2. Blanket insulation.

a. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.



B. LEED Submittals:


2. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content. 3. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for

low-emitting materials. 4. Laboratory Test Reports: For insulation, indicating compliance with requirements for

low-emitting materials.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type VI : ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi minimum compressive strength; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.




a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. Kingspan Insulation. c. Owens Corning.

2.2 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION

A. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation : ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


a. Johns Manville. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Roxul Inc. d. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.

B. Additional Requirements:

1. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 40 percent.

2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors : Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place.


a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Gemco; Spindle Type.

2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length

to suit depth of insulation indicated.

B. Insulation-Retaining Washers Insert drawing designation: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.


a. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150. b. Gemco; S-150.

2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:

a. Ceiling plenums. b. Where indicated.

C. Anchor Adhesive : Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.




a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior walls.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION

A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up either side of partitions.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - 1

SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vapor-retarding, fluid-applied air barriers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air.

B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.

C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessories applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.

D. ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America.



1. Participants: Owner, Architect, Contractor, air barrier installer, air barrier manufacturer’s representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects air barrier.

2. Agenda:

a. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.

1) Include review of penetrations, building deflection joints, and other construction affecting air barrier installation.

b. Review methods, procedures, and construction sequence for air barrier and related construction, including review of manufacturer’s written product specifications and installation instructions.

1) Review requirements for coordination of air barrier with adjacent materials and construction.

c. Review substrate conditions and finishes required to comply with manufacturer’s requirements for installation of air barrier including fastening and flatness of substrate.

3. Air Barrier Manufacturer’s Acceptance: Obtain manufacturer’s acceptance of air barrier for intended use shown on Drawings and of compatibility of air barrier with all materials in contact with air barrier.



1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating each substrate; technical data; dry film thickness; and tested physical and performance properties of products.




1. Product Data: For coatings, indicating VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.

1. Show locations and extent of air-barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions.

2. Include project specific details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.

3. Include project specific details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier including, but not limited to, the following as applicable to this Project:

a. Connection of air barrier in walls to roof membrane. b. Connection of air barrier in walls to air barrier in foundation. c. Application of air barrier to seismic and expansion joints. d. Application of air barrier to openings and penetrations by windows, storefront

framing, curtain wall framing, door frames, piping, conduit, ducts, masonry ties, screws, bolts, and similar components and penetrations.

e. Application of air barrier to precast concrete and other types of exterior wall construction.

D. Samples: Submit minimum 3-inch by 4-inch samples of each air barrier material, clearly labeled to indicate material and use in air barrier system.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Certifications

1. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier.

2. Acceptance of Materials: Submit document from air-barrier manufacturer certifying acceptance of materials proposed for use with air barrier that are not specified in this Section.

3. Substrate Compatibility: Submit document from air-barrier manufacturer certifying that air barrier system materials used to adhere air barrier to substrate are chemically compatible.

C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Field Quality-Control Reports: Submit test results from testing specified in Field Quality Control article in Part 3 of this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.




A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.

1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance. 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less.


A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

1. Movement/Control Joints: Provide air barrier assembly capable of accommodating movements of building and building materials, including providing expansion and control joints and applicable accessories required to accommodate these movements.

a. Provide air barrier assembly capable of withstanding combined design wind, fan, and stack pressures, positive and negative, on building envelope without damage or displacement and transferring loads to structure.

b. Provide air barrier assembly materials that do not displace adjacent materials and air barrier assembly materials under full load.

c. Provide air barrier assembly joined in airtight and flexible manner to air barrier materials incorporated into adjacent construction and that allows relative movement of assemblies due to thermal and moisture variations, creep, and anticipated seismic movement.

2. Connections to Adjacent Materials: Provide connections to adjacent materials that prevent air leakage at following locations:

a. Foundation and walls, including penetrations, ties and anchors. b. Walls, windows, curtain walls, storefronts, louvers and doors. c. Different assemblies and fixed openings within those assemblies. d. Wall and roof connections. e. Floors/soffits over unconditioned space. f. Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. g. Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. h. Seismic and expansion joints. i. All other potential air leakage pathways in building envelope.

B. Drawings show general intent for continuity of vapor-retarding membrane air barrier. Manufacturer and installer are to verify all transitions, movement and penetrations are sealed air tight to provide continuous air barrier.



2.3 HIGH-BUILD AIR BARRIERS, VAPOR RETARDING

A. High-Build, Vapor-Retarding Air Barrier: synthetic polymer membrane with an installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written instructions, of 35 mils or thicker over smooth, void-free substrates.

1. Synthetic Polymer Type:

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; Fire Resist Barritech NP. 2) Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier

Liquid. 3) Henry Company; Air-Bloc 32MR. 4) W. R. Meadows, Inc; Air-Shield LSR.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:

a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.0002 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.

b. Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.1 perm; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method. c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 500 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C. d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to ASTM D

4541. e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly. f. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 90 days according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air-barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer.

C. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning® 123 Silicone Seal. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; US11000

UltraSpan. c. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem Simple Seal.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.

2. Verify that substrates have cured and aged for minimum time recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.

3. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test concrete substrates for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching material.

E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.

F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

H. Bridge isolation joints, expansion joints and discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and deck-to-deck joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.

3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Install accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.

2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.

3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.



B. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

C. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

D. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

E. Wall Openings (joints in shear): Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows and doors. Apply preformed silicone extrusion so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.

1. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and air-barrier material.

2. Refer to Division 08 sections for entrances and storefronts and curtain walls for transition assemblies for concealed perimeter frame surfaces for entrances and storefronts and curtain walls.

F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.

G. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic.

H. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- wide, transition strip.

I. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.4 PRIMARY AIR-BARRIER MATERIAL INSTALLATION

A. Apply air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details. Apply air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

3. Where multiple prime coats are needed to achieve required bond, allow adequate drying time between coats.

B. High-Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air-barrier material to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier material in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.

1. Vapor-Retarding, High-Build Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 35 mils, applied in one or more equal coats.

C. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency.



D. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.



1. Cooperate with Owner’s testing agency, allowing Owner’s testing agency access to work areas and staging and notifying Owner’s testing agency in writing of schedule for Work of this Section to allow sufficient time for testing and inspection by Owner’s testing agency. Do not cover Work of this section until testing and inspection by Owner’s testing agency has been completed and accepted.

B. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements.

1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes.

2. Air-barrier dry film thickness. 3. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided. 4. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and

mortar droppings. 5. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been

maintained. 6. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 7. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 8. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have

been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.

9. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 10. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 11. Compatible materials have been used. 12. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 13. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with

requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal.

14. All penetrations have been sealed.

C. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests:

1. Air-Leakage-Location Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers .

2. Air-Leakage-Volume Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for air-leakage rate according to ASTM E 783.

3. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for required adhesion to substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or part thereof.

D. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.

2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.

E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.



3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer than recommended, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.



STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS

074113.16 - 1

SECTION 074113.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes standing-seam metal roof and wall panels.



1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members.

5. Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing. 6. Review flashings, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition

of other construction that affect metal panels. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and

inspections if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after

installation. 9. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include clips, fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.



074113.16 - 2



B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Twenty-Five (25) years from date of Substantial Completion.



074113.16 - 3

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span. 4. .

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 1680 or ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 or ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

D. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.

E. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.

1. Uplift Rating: UL 60.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.



074113.16 - 4

2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514.

B. Vertical-Rib, Snap-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and a flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and snapping panels together.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Firestone Building Products, Inc.; UC-4, Cladgard SA underlayment, Bearing Plate, and ISOGard HD Composite Insulation or comparable product by one of the following:

a. ATAS International. b. MBCI; a division of NCI Group, Inc.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.034 inch. b. Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Clips: One-piece fixed to accommodate thermal movement.

a. Material: 0.064-inchnominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.

4. Panel Coverage: 16 inches. 5. Panel Height: 1.5 inch.

2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board or ASTM C 1278, fiber-reinforced gypsum board; Type X, 5/8 inch thick.


a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products; Dens Deck Prime. b. Certainteed Corp.; GlasRoc Sheathing Type X. c. National Gypsum Company: Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing. d. United States Gypsum Company; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board or Securock

Glass-Fiber Roof Board.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6905&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123457046490&mf=04&src=wd



074113.16 - 5

2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by metal roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Closed cell polyisocyanurate foam coare lamianted to a1/2 inch high density polyisocyanurate board. ASTM C 1289, Type IV, Class I, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

1. Compressive Strength: ASTM D1621, 20 psi. 2. Density: ASTM D1622, 2 pcf. 3. Thickness: As indicated.


A. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

B. Bearing Plate: Provide manufacturer's bearing plate for installation over insulation boards.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.



074113.16 - 6

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Steel Panels and Accessories:

1. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.



074113.16 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, with end joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.

1. At steel roof decks, install substrate board at right angle to flutes of deck.

a. Locate end joints over crests of steel roof deck.

2. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 3. Cut substrate board to fit tight around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks. 4. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners,

perimeter, and field of roof according to membrane roofing system manufacturers' written instructions.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Comply with metal roofing and wall system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

1. Coordinate installation of metal roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of workday.

B. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches (610 mm) in adjacent rows.

1. Locate end joints over crests of decking. 2. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks.



074113.16 - 8

3. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in width. 4. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation. 5. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation using mechanical fasteners specifically

designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to metal decks.

a. Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3.5 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply over all insulation, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

1. Apply over the entire roof surface.

B. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3.6 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.

Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.

3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices

and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws.

Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. 8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.

B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

E. Standing-Seam Metal Roof and Wall Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof and wall panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.



074113.16 - 9

2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory-applied sealant.

4. Watertight Installation:

a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight.

b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

c. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal roof panel manufacturers; or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

H. Roof Curbs: Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels.

I. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.

B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.



074113.16 - 10

C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074113.16


COMPOSITE FRAMING SUPPORT (CFS) SYSTEM

074210.41 - 1

SECTION 074210.41 - COMPOSITE FRAMING SUPPORT (CFS) SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Composite framing support (CFS) system with in-fill insulation integrated with exterior wall cladding.


A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product indicated; include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and accessories as necessary for complete fully functioning and assembled system.


A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened containers and packaging with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Deliver components and other manufactured items or accessories without damage or deformation.

C. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry, and level interior areas or outdoor areas for limited duration in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Protect components and auxiliary accessories during transportation, handling, and installation from moisture, excessive temperatures and other construction operations in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Handle components in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations, and in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface, edge or corner damage.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of wall cladding support system over substrate indicated for proper drainage, flashing, trim, back-up support, soffits, and other related Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Advanced Architectural Products; SMARTci Composite Framing Support (CFS) system or comparable product approved by the Architect.


A. System Thermal Design: Ensure installed insulation and CFS clip system, sub-framing, clips and cladding attachment does not have thermal bridging of fasteners or framing that creates a continuous metal path from exterior surface of insulation to interior face of insulation.

B. Temperature: Comply with structural loading requirements within temperature range of minus 55 degrees F to 180 degrees F.




074210.41 - 2

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide composite framing support system with fire-test results indicated as determined by test standard indicated and applied by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: In compliance with ASTM E84, for foam insulation, fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) and interior surfaces as follows:

a. Flame Spread Index (FSI): 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less.

2. Intermediate Scale Multistory Fire Test: Comply with NFPA 285 and/or IBC acceptance criteria for wall height above grade and fire separation distances, when wall type and other noted conditions require such testing or compliance with requirements as indicated.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. CFS System: Provide CFS system consisting of polyester and vinyl ester bioresin matrix (FRP) with recycled materials, fire retardant additives and integral continuous metal inserts the length of profile. Reinforce CFS system with glass strand rovings used internally for longitudinal (lengthwise) strength and continuous strand glass mats or stitched reinforcements used internally for transverse (crosswise) strength.

1. Depth: As indicated on drawings. 2. On Center Spacing: 24 inches or as required for material being supported. 3. Provide continuous non-corrosive steel insert for engagement of fasteners, 16 gage,

minimum thickness, with G90 galvanized coating designation in compliance with ASTM A653/A653M.

a. Fully engage steel insert with adjacent CFS at ends. b. Anchor sub-girts and other wall cladding support accessories to steel insert set into

and part of CFS.

4. Provide integral 3-point compression seal in CFS sections to ensure insulation panel will not dislodge.

5. Provide integral anti-siphon grooves on exterior and interior flanges of CFS. 6. Provide force distribution zones integrally designed into profile of CFS. 7. Provide spline seals for adjacent insulation units into profile of CFS. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics:

a. Flame Spread Index (FSI): 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

b. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

9. Flammability: Comply with ASTM E84. 10. Self-Extinguishing: Comply with ASTM D635. 11. Profile Visual Requirements: Comply with ASTM D4385. 12. Tensile Stress: Provide engineered lengthwise and crosswise tensile stress in

compliance with performance loading criteria and specified safety factors, in accordance with ASTM D638.

13. Compressive Stress: Provide engineered lengthwise and crosswise compressive stress in compliance with performance loading criteria and specified safety factors, in accordance with ASTM D695.

14. Flexural Stress: Provide engineered lengthwise and crosswise flexural stress in compliance with performance loading criteria and specified safety factors, in accordance with ASTM D790.



074210.41 - 3

15. Modulus of Elasticity: Engineered to meet performance loading criteria and specified safety factors.

16. Barcol Hardness: 45, in accordance with ASTM D2583. 17. Water Absorption: Less than 0.46 percent by weight, within 24 hours, tested in

accordance with ASTM D570. 18. Density: Within range of 0.062 to 0.070 lbs/cubic inch, in accordance with ASTM D792. 19. Lengthwise Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 7.0 x 10ˉ6 inch/inch/degrees F, in

accordance with ASTM D696. 20. Notched Izod Impact, Lengthwise: 24 ft lbs/inch, in accordance with ASTM D256 within

temperature range indicated. 21. Notched Izod Impact, Crosswise: 4 ft lbs/inch, in accordance with ASTM D256 within

temperature range indicated.

B. INSULATION

1. Insulation Panel Edges: Provide factory formed edges on insulation panels that interlock with CFS system components.

2. Polyisocyanurate Panel Insulation: Rigid closed cell foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type II, Class 1, cellulose felt or glass fiber mat both faces; Grade 3, 25 psi compressive strength.

a. Flame Spread Index (FSI): 25 or less, tested in accordance with ASTM E84. b. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, tested in accordance with ASTM

E84. c. Thermal Resistance: 2 inch, R-Value 13.3; ASTM C518 at 75 degrees F. d. Comply with fire-resistance requirements, as indicated on drawings, and as part of

an exterior non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.

e. Board Edges: Square. f. Compressive Strength: Grade 3, 25 psi; tested in compliance with ASTM D1621. g. Dimensional Stability: Less than 2 percent linear change after 7 days; ASTM

D2126. h. Moisture Vapor Permeance: Less than 0.05 perm; ASTM E96/E96M. i. Water Absorption: Less than 0.05 percent by volume; tested to ASTM C209. j. Service Temperature: Range of minus 100 degrees F to 250 degrees F. k. Acceptable Products:

1) Atlas Roof Insulation 2) Hunter Panels, LLC 3) RMAX Operating, LLC

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, self-tapping and self-drilling screws, bolts, nuts, and other fasteners as recommended by CFS system manufacturer for project application.

1. Cladding to CFS System: Use standard self-tapping metal screws. 2. CFS System to Metal Stud Wall Framing: Use standard self-tapping metal screws. 3. CFS System to Concrete/CMU: Use standard masonry or concrete screw anchors in

predrilled hole. 4. DO NOT USE powder, air, or gas actuated fasteners or actuated fastener tools. DO

NOT USE impact wrenches when fastening to or from the CFS.



074210.41 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas of this work, and project conditions with installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrates, CFS system conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of this Work.

B. Examine structural wall framing to ensure that angles, channels, studs, and other structural support members have been installed within alignment tolerances required by CFS system manufacturer.

C. Examine rough-in for components and systems penetrating CFS system to coordinate actual locations of penetrations relative to CFS systems joint locations prior to installation.

D. Verify that mechanical and electrical services for exterior walls have been installed and tested and, if appropriate, verify that adjacent materials and finishes are dry and ready to receive insulation.

E. Proceed with installation only after wall substrate surfaces have been properly prepared and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by CFS manufacturer for achieving best result for substrate under project conditions.

C. Prepare sub-framing, base angles, sills, furring, and other CFS system members and provide anchorage in accordance with ASTM C754 for substrate type and wall cladding type in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install CFS system in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install system to fill-in exterior spaces without gaps or voids, and do not compress insulation panels.

C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces, and insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.

D. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of Mechanical/Electrical services within plane of insulation.

E. Seal gaps, voids or penetrations completely with approved expandable foam sealant on exterior and interior (if visible) before enclosing wall.

F. Provide spray foam to seal metal penetrations, including cantilevered fasteners, to prevent interstitial space condensation.

G. Exposed insulation must be protected from open flame and kept dry at all times.

H. Exterior wall insulation panels are not intended to be left exposed for periods of time in excess of 60 days without adequate protection.

1. When extended exposure is anticipated, protect exposed insulation surfaces including corners, window and door openings with a compatible waterproof tape.

I. Install CFS system in compliance with system orientation, sizes, and locations as indicated on drawings.



074210.41 - 5

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Shim and align CFS system within installed tolerances of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-cumulative, level, plumb, and on location lines as indicated.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Ensure that insulation panels are not exposed to moisture.

1. Remove wet insulation panels or allow them to completely dry prior to installation of CFS system.

C. Replace damaged insulation panels prior to Date of Substantial Completion.




074210.41 - 6



FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 1

SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. 2. Metal liner panels.



1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.




5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and after installation.

8. Review of procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish







C. Shop Drawings:


2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.



D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.








E. Copper Panels: Wear gloves when handling to prevent fingerprints and soiling of surface.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.8 WARRANTY




2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.







PART 2 - PRODUCTS



1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels : Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs and a flat pan between major ribs.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Centria EcoScreen Perforated Screenwall Series BR5-36 or comparable product by one of the following and approved by the Architect:

a. Berridge Manufacturing Company. b. Morin - A Kingspan Group Company. c. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.

a. Thickness: 0.040 inch. b. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. c. Panel Coverage: 36 inches. d. Panel Height: 1.5 inches. e. Rib Spacing: 5 at 7.20 inches on center. f. Perforation Pattern: 30% Staggered, 1/8 inch diameter perforations at 7/32

inches on center. g. Side Joints: Overlapping. h. End Laps: Overlapping. i. Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer . j. Color: To match standing seam metal roofing.

2.3 METAL LINER PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal liner panels designed for interior side walls and field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for a complete installation.

B. Metal Liner Panels : Solid panels formed with a flat pan between panel edges; with a flush joint between panels. To be installed behind perforated panels in a shingle lap utilizing stainless steel exposed fasteners painted to match the panel.

1. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.

a. Thickness: 0.032 inch. b. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. c. Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer .







d. Color: Matte black.

2. Panel Coverage: 36 inches. 3. Seam Profile: Flush.


A. Miscellaneous Aluminum Extrusions, Subframing and Furring: ASTM B 211 and ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

C. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.


D. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

1. Provide custom extruded or bent aluminum shapes and trims as indicated on the drawings.

E. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

2.5 FABRICATION








2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.



a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.6 FINISHES


B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Aluminum Panels and Accessories:


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.




3.2 PREPARATION











B. Fasteners:

1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.

E. Metal Liner Panels: Install panels on exterior face of wall where indicated, under the perforated panels. Install shingle lap. Leave bottom of panel unfastened to provide ventilation gaps using screw heads as spacers.

F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.



G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).



B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.19 - 1

SECTION 074213.19 - INSULATED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Foamed-insulation-core metal wall panels.



1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.




5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels.

6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable.

7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and after installation.

8. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish







C. Shop Drawings:


2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches .



D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.


A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.












1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY











PART 2 - PRODUCTS



1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.

B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. .

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 15 lbf/sq. ft. .

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide metal wall panels and system components with the following fire-test-response characteristics, as determined by testing identical panels and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119.

2. Intermediate-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Tested mockup, representative of completed multistory wall assembly of which wall panel is a part, complies with NFPA 285 for test method and required fire-test-response characteristics of exterior non-load-bearing wall panel assemblies.

3. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition when tested according to NFPA 268. 4. Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259. 5. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide wall panels with a flame-spread index of 25 or

less and a smoke-developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84.



2.2 FOAMED-INSULATION-CORE METAL WALL PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed and -assembled metal wall panels fabricated from two metal facing sheets and insulation core foamed in place during fabrication, and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Insulation Core: Modified isocyanurate or polyurethane foam using a non-CFC blowing agent, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively.

a. Density: 2.5 to 2.9 lb/cu. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 1622.

B. Type 1: Concealed-Fastener, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels: Formed with tongue-and-groove panel edges; designed for sequential installation by interlocking panel edges and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips or fasteners.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Formawall Graphix Series Insulated Core Metal Wall Panels or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Kingspan Insulated Panels.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Facings of zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.030 inch. b. Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.

1) Color B: Dove Gray. Extrusions to match Dove Gray.

c. Interior Finish: Siliconized polyester.

1) Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

3. Texture: Embossed. 4. Panel Coverage: 36 inches nominal. 5. Panel Thickness: 2.5 inches. 6. Panel Reveals: 1/2 inch at 18 inches o.c.

C. Type 2: Concealed-Fastener, Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels: Formed with tongue-and-groove panel edges; designed for sequential installation by interlocking panel edges and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips or fasteners.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Formawall Graphix Series Insulated Core Metal Wall Panels or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Kingspan Insulated Panels.

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Facings of zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.030 inch. b. Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer.

1) Color A: Slate Gray. Extrusions to match Slate Gray.







c. Interior Finish: Siliconized polyester.

1) Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Panel Coverage: 16 inches nominal. 5. Panel Thickness: 3 inches.


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

1. Metal Thickness: Minimum 16 gauge. 2. Depth: As indicated on the drawings.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.


C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2.4 FABRICATION








2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.



a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.5 FINISHES


B. Steel Panels and Accessories:


2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.






3.2 PREPARATION









B. Fasteners:

1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

2. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.4 INSULATED METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Apply continuous ribbon of sealant to panel joint on concealed side of insulated metal wall panels as vapor seal; apply sealant to panel joint on exposed side of panels for weather seal.

1. Fasten foamed-insulation-core metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.



2. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.

3. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners on weather side of insulated metal wall panels.

4. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.

5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of insulated metal wall panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to panel side laps and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight.

7. Apply snap-on battens to exposed-fastener, insulated-core metal wall panel seams to conceal fasteners.

B. Foamed-Insulation-Core Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with concealed clips at each joint at location and spacing and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Fully engage tongue and groove of adjacent panels.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.

C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to achieve waterproof performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).



B. Water-Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly as directed by Architect for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories.

D. Metal wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass test and inspections.

E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.






B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FACED PANELS 074400 - 1

SECTION 074400 - FACED PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes concrete faced insulated wall panels.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

B. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between 30 176C and 30 176C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer.

C. ASTM D 1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

D. ASTM D 2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

E. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.


A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of product indicated. Data sheets to include the following:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

B. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provides design, engineering, fabrications and testing of all required components and assemblies for a complete system.


A. Deliver materials in original packages with manufacturer's labels intact and clearly identifying products.

B. Store materials covered, dry and protected from weather, surface contamination, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and the causes.

C. Keep panels, steel components and fasteners protected from the elements prior to installation.

D. Store the panels laying flat.

E. Do not drop panels.

F. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.



1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide T Clear Corporation; WallGUARD concrete faced insulated perimeter wall panels or a comparable product approved by the Architect.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Perimeter Foundation Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board to ASTM C 578 ype IV, rigid, closed cell, with integral high density skin, c/w integral 5/16 inch thick latex-modified concrete facing.

1. Board Size: 2 feet by 4 feet by 2-5/16 inches and 3-5/16 inches thick. 2. Edges: Tongue and groove sides, square edge ends. 3. Maximum Use Temperature: 165 degree F. 4. Thermal Resistance (ASTM C 518): Long term aged R-value of 5 per inch. 5. Foam Compressive Strength, ASTM D 1621, minimum: 35 psi. 6. Compressive Strength: to ASTM D 1621, minimum 40 psi. 7. Water Absorption (ASTM D 2842): <0.1 (0.7% by volume maximum). 8. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E 96): 0.8. 9. Coefficient of Lineal Thermal Expansion ( ASTM D 696, in/in x degree F): 3.5 x 10-5.

B. Accessories:

1. Metal Cap Flashing: 24 ga galvanized steel J-channel; 2-1/4 inches wide, 4 inches long leg and 2-1/4 inches short leg; prefinished in color as selected.

2. Clips and Fasteners: corrosion-resistant type, sized to suit application; as supplied by insulation manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



3.4 CONCRETE FACED INSULATED PERIMETER WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Perimeter Insulation Substrate Examination (Poured Concrete or Concrete Block Only):

1. Verify that the insulation boards and adjacent materials are compatible. 2. Verify that the substrate is flat, sound, clean and remove any masonry irregularities or

jagged surfaces on the foundation wall.

B. Perimeter Insulation Installation:

1. Layout concrete-faced insulation boards to maximize board sizes. Do not use boards less than 6 inches wide.

2. Install concrete-faced insulation board system in orientation as indicated or to maximize full sheets. Complete with fastening clips and cap flashing in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.



ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

075323 - 1

SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Adhered ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) membrane roofing system. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Cover board. 4. Walkways.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof systems" apply to work of this Section.

B. Roofing System: Includes all materials, components and installation requirements required by roofing system manufacturer to provide specified warranty for applications shown on Drawings.


A. Pre-Installation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.


4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including roofing system manufacturer’s specifications and installation instruction and data substantiating compliance with specified requirements.

1. For insulation and roof system component fasteners, include copy of FM Approvals' RoofNav listing.



075323 - 2


1. Product Test Reports: For roof materials, documentation indicating that roof materials comply with Solar Reflectance Index requirements.

2. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, indicating VOC content. 3. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled

content and cost.

C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Layout and thickness of insulation. 2. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 3. Flashing details at penetrations. 4. Tapered insulation, thickness and slopes. 5. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. 6. Tie-in with air barrier.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Roof membrane and flashings, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.

2. Roof insulation. 3. Walkway pads or rolls of color specified. 4. Termination bars. 5. One insulation fastener of each type, length, and finish.

E. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind uplift performance requirements.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer certifying that membrane roofing system complies with requirements specified in “Performance Requirements” Article.

1. Requirements specified in “Performance Requirements•Article in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Requirements to provide specified warranties. 3. Tested and listed by FM for class specified in “Performance Requirements” Article in Part

2 of this Section for minimum 20 years. 4. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements. 5. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roofing membrane manufacturer, certifying that

all materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.

C. Installer Certificates: Written certification of the Installer's experience and authorization from roofing system manufacturer for Installer to install roofing system.

D. Sample Warranties: Sample of manufacturer’s special warranties.

E. Reports

1. Field quality-control reports. 2. Annual inspection reports.


A. Maintenance Data: For membrane roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.



075323 - 3


A. Installer Qualifications: Qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Special warranty includes, but is not limited to, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, and other components of roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: Total system warranty for 20 years from date of Final Completion.

a. This warranty will run concurrently with the roofing contractor/installer thirty-six (36) month guaranty.

b. This warranty will cover labor and materials for the complete roofing system and the watertight integrity and performance of the roofing system installed which includes all components identified under the roofing contractor/installer 36-month warranty.

c. Manufacturer will be liable for a full replacement cost of the roof system; No-Dollar Limit Warranty.

d. Roofing contractor shall provide the Owner with an Application for a Roof Warranty. Warranty shall not exclude coverage as a result of winds less than the code required design wind loads.



075323 - 4

e. Owner will notify roofing contractor and manufacturer, if repairs covered by the warranty are required, within twenty (20) days of discovery of defects in the roofing system. Upon written notice from the Owner of any breech of warranty during applicable warranty period due to defective material or workmanship, the affected part or parts thereof will be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner within thirty (30) days of receipt of notice. Contractors should notify Owners when they come on Campus for warranty repairs. Should the roofing contractor or roofing manufacturer fail or refuse to make necessary repairs or replacements, when requested by the Owner, the Owner may perform, or cause the necessary work to be performed at the roofing contractor and manufacturer's expense.

f. The following are excluded from this warranty:

1) Roof maintenance. 2) Damage to any part of the building (other than the roofing system) or to its

contents. 3) Damage resulting from any one of the following:

a) Cracking, warping, deflection or movement of building foundation. b) Natural disasters such as earthquake, hail, or wind exceeding the

code required design wind loads. c) Accidents, vandalism, or other uncontrollable events. d) Chemical attacks on the membrane from sources not present at time

of roofing system installation. e) Excessive movement or deterioration of metal components adjacent

to the roof or engaged therein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Provide installed membrane roofing and base flashings capable withstanding specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and incorporating membrane roofing and base flashings that remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roofing membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272, or the Resistance to Foot Traffic Test in FM Approvals 4470.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift pressures when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897:

1. Zone 1 (Roof Area Field): 30 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Zone 2 (Roof Area Perimeter): 50 lbf/sq. ft..

a. Location: From roof edge to 10 feet inside roof edge.

3. Zone 3 (Roof Area Corners): 75 lbf/sq. ft..

a. Location: 10 feet in each direction from building corner.



075323 - 5

D. FM Approvals’ RoofNav Listing: Provide roof membrane, base flashings, and component materials complying with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of membrane roofing system, and are listed in FM Approvals’ RoofNav for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals Certification markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 2. Hail Resistance: SH.

2.2 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-TERPOLYMER (EPDM) MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Non-Reinforced EPDM Sheet: ASTM D 4637, Type I, non-reinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet (contractor option) with factory-applied seam tape.


a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated; Sure-Seal EPDM. b. Firestone Building Products; RubberGard EPDM. c. Johns Manville, a Berkshire Hathaway company; JM EPDM NR 60. d. Versico Incorporated; Versico Non-Reinforced EPDM.

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 4. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane

manufacturer or manufacturers approved by roof membrane manufacturer.

2.3 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L. f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. g. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L. h. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. i. Non-Membrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. l. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.

C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.



075323 - 6

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. Or factory-applied seam tape, width as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant, colored to match membrane roofing.

G. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.

H. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening components to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.

2.4 SUBSTRATE BOARDS

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board or ASTM C 1278, fiber-reinforced gypsum board; Type X, 5/8 inch thick.


a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products; Dens Deck Prime. b. Certainteed Corp.; GlasRoc Sheathing Type X. c. National Gypsum Company: Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing. d. United States Gypsum Company; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board or Securock

Glass-Fiber Roof Board.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM membrane roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals’¢ RoofNav-approved roof insulation.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.


a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products. c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

2. Compressive Strength: 25 psi. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches. 4. Thickness: As indicated on the drawings.



075323 - 7

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

1. Material: Match roof insulation. 2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. Slope:

a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with other roofing system components.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive. 2. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L. f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. g. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. h. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. i. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 5/8 inch thick, factory primed, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.


a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products; Dens Deck Prime. b. Certainteed Corp.; GlasRoc Sheathing. c. National Gypsum Company: Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing. d. United States Gypsum Company: Securock Glass-Mat Roof Board.

2. Surface Finish: Factory primed.

2.7 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

1. Size: As indicated on Drawings 2. Color: Contrasting with roof membrane.



075323 - 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

B. Coordinate installation and transition of roofing system component serving as an air barrier with air barrier specified under Section 072726 "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers."

3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, with end joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.

1. At steel roof decks, install substrate board at right angle to flutes of deck.

a. Locate end joints over crests of steel roof deck.

2. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 3. Cut substrate board to fit tight around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks. 4. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners,

perimeter, and field of roof according to membrane roofing system manufacturers' written instructions.

3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

1. Coordinate installation of membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of workday.



075323 - 9

B. Installation Over Metal Decking:

1. Install base layer of insulation with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in adjacent rows.

a. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.

b. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. c. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each

side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.

1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.

d. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. e. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. f. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation and substrate board using mechanical

fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to metal decks.

1) Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.

a. Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in adjacent rows.

b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.

c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each

side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches. e. Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted. f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. h. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM

Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as follows:

1) Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS

A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.

2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump.

a. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted.



075323 - 10

B. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations.

1. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as follows:

a. Set cover board in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.7 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow membrane to relax before installing.

1. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel and Owner’s testing and inspection agency.

2. Accurately align roof membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

3. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeters.

4. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. 5. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that does not comply with

requirements.

B. Adhesive Installation of Roof Membrane

1. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice area of roof membrane.

2. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane in place with clamping ring.

C. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roof to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations.

D. Factory-Applied Seam Tape Installation: Clean and prime surface to receive tape. Firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roof membrane to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations.

E. Roof Drains: Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.8 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.



075323 - 11

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.9 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products and adhere to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install flexible walkways at the following locations:

a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit. b. Between each rooftop unit location, creating a continuous path connecting rooftop

unit locations. c. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop

unit locations. d. Top and bottom of each roof access ladder. e. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path connecting

rooftop unit locations. f. Locations indicated on Drawings. g. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements.

2. Provide 6-inch clearance between adjoining pads.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage qualified independent testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, roof membrane application, sheet flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect.

B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following tests:

1. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnelto inspect roofing installation on completion, in the presence of Architect, and to prepare inspection report.

a. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

b. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Annual Inspection: Roofing contractor and roofing manufacturer accompanied by a designated University representative will perform, at no additional cost to the Owner, an annual inspection of the complete roofing system installation through the (36 month) contractor's warranty period. This inspection will include a written detailed evaluation of the roofing system including system failures and maintenance recommendations. All roofing system failures and defects will be repaired/corrected by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner within thirty (30) days from date of annual inspection. These repair/corrections will include replacing an and all wet insulation. All repairs will be approved by, and made to the satisfaction of, the Owner's representative.

3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.



075323 - 12

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Formed Products:

a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed overhead-piping safety pans.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.



1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and

attachment to structural members. 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs,

and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant. 6. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 7. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.



C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.



2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of

expansion and contraction from fixed points. 6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable. 7. Details of special conditions. 8. Details of connections to adjoining work.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. 4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each color

required.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Coil-Coated Metal with Flouropolymer Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.


a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.



b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. LEED Requirements

a. Credit MR 4: Provide aluminum sheet with not less than 90 percent recycled content (post-consumer plus 1/2 pre-consumer).

b. Credit MR 5.1: Provide aluminum sheet consisting of material extracted, processed and manufactured not more than 500 miles from the project location.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes:

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

b. Color: Two custom colors as selected by Architect.

4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat and with manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides.




A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or passivated Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according

to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead with maximum lead content of 0.2 percent.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

5. Fabricate corners, intersections and transitions in shop.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

1. For embedment of metal flashing flanges in roofing or composition flashing or stripping, extend flanges for a minimum of 4-inches embedment.



C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

1. Provide for thermal expansion of running items of more than 15 feet continuous length.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured and from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, non-corrosive metal.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.

1. Metals Being Soldered: Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 2. Aluminum Sheet and Metals with Coated Finish: Form seams and seal with elastomeric

sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

3. Aluminum Sheet without Painted or Coated Finish: Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Gutter Profile: Box type as indicated on Drawings. 2. Expansion Joints: Lap type. 3. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

4. Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials:


5. Gutter Wrap: Fabricated from 0.0625 inch thick aluminum in custom color selected by the Architect. Provide continuous cleat and concealed fastener attachment as detailed on the drawings.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. Shop fabricate elbows.

1. Hanger Style: As appropriate for downspout as indicated. 2. Fabricate from the following materials:


C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.



D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim, and built-in overflows. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.



A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.



C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into

joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

H. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.

3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia and firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. 2. Loosely lock straps to front gutter bead and anchor to roof deck. 3. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than 24

inches apart. 4. Anchor gutter with straps spaced not more than 24 inches apart to roof deck, unless

otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead. 5. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart.

Install expansion-joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.

1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.

2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.



D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.

1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and solder or seal with elastomeric sealant to scupper.

2. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head. 3. Seal with elastomeric sealant exterior wall scupper flanges into back of conductor head.

E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch below scupper or gutter discharge.

F. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer’s written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans independent from structure above as indicated on Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system.


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Copings. 2. Roof-edge specialties.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, roofing-system testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing-system manufacturer's representative, Installer, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roof specialties, including installers of roofing materials and accessories.

2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.

3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will affect roof specialties.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.



C. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties.

1. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

2. Include details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction.

3. Indicate profile and pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments.

4. Detail termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Include details of special conditions.


1. Include Samples of each type of roof specialty to verify finish and color selection, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

2. Include copings and roof-edge specialties made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components in specified material, and including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of roof specialty.

B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.




A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer offering products meeting requirements that are SPRI ES-1 tested to specified design pressure.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain roof specialties approved by manufacturer providing roofing-system warranty specified in Section "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing".


A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify profiles and tolerances of roof-specialty substrates by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Roofing-System Warranty: Roof specialties are included in warranty provisions in Section "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing."

B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings roof-edge specialties tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.



C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


2.2 COPINGS

A. Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with finish matching coping caps.


a. OMG Roofing Products. b. Metal-Era, Inc.

2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Coping Caps: Aluminum sheet, as required by performance requirements, but a minimum of 0.063 inch thick.

a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. b. Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on, fabricated from coping-cap material.

a. Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches wide, with integral cleats.

2.3 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES

A. Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a continuous metal receiver with integral drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover and secure single-ply roof membrane. Provide matching corner units.


a. OMG Roofing Products. b. Metal-Era, Inc.

2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Fascia Covers: Aluminum sheet, as required by performance requirements, but a 0.063 inch thick.

a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. b. Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer. c. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 4. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover. 5. Receiver: Extruded aluminum, 0.080 inch thick.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 , alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.







B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 , alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, finished as follows:


A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type joints with limited movement.

D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

2.6 FINISHES


B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Coil-Coated Aluminum Sheet Finishes:

1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.



3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.

4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

3.3 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.

1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements.

3.4 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.

3.5 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.



B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 077129 - 1

SECTION 077129 - MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Extruded bellows roof expansion joints.




1. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: For roof expansion joints.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of splices, intersections, transitions, fittings, method of field assembly, and

location and size of each field splice. 3. Provide isometric drawings of intersections, terminations, changes in joint direction or

planes, and transition to other expansion joint systems depicting how components interconnect with each other and adjacent construction to allow movement and achieve waterproof continuity.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace roof expansion joints and components that leak, deteriorate beyond normal weathering, or otherwise fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint seals, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 EXTRUDED BELLOWS ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS (E-1)

A. Extruded Bellows Roof Expansion Joint: Manufactured, continuous, waterproof, joint cover assembly; consisting of primary and secondary, single-layered, elastomeric seals; secured along each edge with extruded-aluminum retainers for fastening to substrate.

1. Basis-of-Design Product:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Michael Rizza Company; RW-2g or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Balco, Inc. b. MM Systems Corporation.

2. Joint Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent of joint size.






3. Primary Seal: Silicone extrusion (Basis-of-Design: Dow 790); color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturers full range of colors.

4. Secondary Seal: EPDM, or manufacturer's standard elastomeric seal. 5. Corner, Intersection, and Transition Units: Provide factory-fabricated units for corner and

joint intersections and horizontal and vertical transitions including those to other building expansion joints.

B. Materials:

1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 for extrusions; mill finish, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

a. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or preservative-treated wood materials.

2. Silicone Extrusions: ASTM D 2000, UV stabilized, and that does not propagate flame.


A. Adhesives: As recommended by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand design loads.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Gasketed. Use screws with hex washer heads matching color of material being fastened.

C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joint openings, substrates, and expansion-control joint systems that interface with roof expansion joints, for suitable conditions where roof expansion joints will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof expansion joints.

1. Anchor roof expansion joints securely in place, with provisions for required movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and miscellaneous items as required to complete roof expansion joints.

2. Install roof expansion joints true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

3. Provide for linear thermal expansion of roof expansion joint materials. 4. Provide uniform profile of roof expansion joint throughout its length; do not stretch or

squeeze membranes. 5. Provide uniform, neat seams. 6. Install roof expansion joints to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

B. Directional Changes: Install factory-fabricated units at directional changes to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and watertight joints.



C. Transitions to Other Expansion-Control Joint Assemblies: Coordinate installation of roof expansion joints with other exterior expansion-control joint assemblies specified in Section 079513.16 "Exterior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies" to result in watertight performance.

D. Splices: Splice roof expansion joints to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and waterproof joints.

1. Install waterproof splices and prefabricated end dams to prevent leakage of secondary-seal membrane.

E. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.



ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof hatches.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.


B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.

1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

2.2 ROOF HATCH

A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and weathertight perimeter gasketing, straight sides, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bilco Company; Type S-50TB (thermally broken) or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Babcock-Davis. b. O'Keeffe's Inc.

B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches.

C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load.



D. Hatch Material: Aluminum sheet.

1. Thickness: 11 guage. 2. Finish: Mill.

E. Construction:

1. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board.

a. R-Value: 20 according to ASTM C 1363. 2. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal

liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. 3. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb. 4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Hardware: Spring operators, hold-open arm, stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, stainless-steel butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.

G. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps, fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation; attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or galvanized-steel tube,

1-5/8 inches in diameter. 3. Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches high by 3/8 inch thick. 4. Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21 inches

in diameter. 5. Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing

system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism. 6. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated

end fittings. 7. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of

handrail and railing members. 8. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight. 9. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system. 10. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

H. Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-access ladder.

1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to closed position.

2. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 3. Material: Steel tube. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 METAL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Mill Finish: As manufactured.



B. Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated.

D. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube.

E. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness and thermal resistivity as indicated.

C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS


B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.

3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.

4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.



B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance.

C. Roof-Hatch Installation:

1. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanism and hardware.

2. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb. 3. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Seal joints with butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 1

SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rail-type, seam-mounted snow guards.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for snow guards.

B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans showing layouts and attachment details of snow guards.

1. Include details of rail-type snow guards. 2. Include calculation of number and location of snow guards based on snow load, roof

slope, roof type, components, spacings, and finish.

C. Samples: Base, bracket, and 12-inch- long rail.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of snow guard, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Performance Requirements: Provide snow guards that withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Structural Performance:

1. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 RAIL-TYPE SNOW GUARDS

A. Seam-Mounted, Rail-Type Snow Guards:


a. Alpine SnowGuards; a division of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc. b. LMCurbs. c. Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd.; S-5! Attachment Solutions.

2. Description: Snow guard rails fabricated from metal pipes, bars, or extrusions, anchored to brackets and equipped with one rail with color-matching inserts of material and finish used for metal roofing.

3. Material and Finish: Aluminum; clear anodized.





SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, snow guard attachment, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare substrates for bonding snow guards.

B. Prime substrates according to snow guard manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install snow guards according to manufacturer's written instructions. Space rows as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Attachment for Standing-Seam Metal Roofing:

1. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roofing, or fastening methods that void metal roofing finish warranty.

2. Seam-Mounted, Rail-Type Snow Guards: Stainless-steel clamps attached to vertical ribs of standing-seam metal roof panels.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. 4. Control voltage, communications and electronic safety and security cable penetrations.


A. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.




1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.

C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL).

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.



B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: Firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping systems similar in material, design, and extend to the systems required for this Project whose work has resulted in construction with record of successful performance and that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," and been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

1. Where applicable, licensed by the State where the Project is located or local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

2. Qualifications include having necessary experience, staff, and training to install penetration firestopping system in accordance with specified requirements.



3. Manufacturer’s willingness to sell its penetration firestopping systems to Contractor or installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself constitute approval.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide firestopping conforming to the requirements of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and that has been reviewed by the applicable agency.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven (7) days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Provide penetration firestopping systems bearing classification marking of UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

B. Penetration Firestopping Assembly Standard: Provide tested penetration firestopping assemblies that comply with and are installed in accordance with penetration firestopping assembly manufacturer’s installation instructions and all written and graphic requirements in test assembly documentation.

1. If penetration firestopping assemblies do not comply with requirements, research testing agency documents such as UL Online Certifications Directory or UL Fire Resistance Directory for assemblies that comply.

2. If no penetration firestopping assemblies that comply can be identified, submit proposed “Engineering Judgement” to Architect as specified in Submittals article in Part 1 of this Section.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products; . b. Hilti, Inc.; . c. Specified Technologies, Inc.; .

2. Where openings around penetrating items do not meet UL system requirements, provide materials and systems with matching construction materials as required by the annular opening size requirement of the UL system. Where the opening cannot be closed as required to meet the annular opening size requirements of UL, obtain an engineering judgment of the UL system to be used from the Engineering Department of the manufacturer of the firestopping materials, verified in writing by UL.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa).

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm (0.024-cu. m/s) cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Control Voltage, Communications and Electronic Safety and Security Cable Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls and Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings described in this Section and with the ability for Owner to add or remove cables without the need for replacing fill materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide one of following fire-rated assemblies:

a. CP 653 Speed Sleeve by Hilti, Inc. b. EZ Path Series 44+ by Specified Technologies, Inc.

2. Provide collars and plates required for mounting single and multiple devices adjacent to each other.

3. Accessories: Provide following accessories required for applications indicated on Drawings:

a. Extension module increasing effective length. b. Radius control module providing minimum bend radius for twisted pair cables. c. Multi-gang wall bracket to allow one to five pathways in finished wall to be

supported from stud. d. Modular floor grid system allowing banks of pathways in floor. e. T-rating accessory kit.



f. Caps for unoccupied wall bracket gangs to allow future capacity.

F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows, bags or cushions consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:



1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

K. Putty Pad or Box Insert: Protective materials designed to protect electrical outlet boxes.

L. Firestop Board: Material for large openings to accommodate electrical busways, raceways, cable trays, and multiple copper pipes.

M. Drop-In Device: Pre-formed device with integrated intumescent strips for use with noncombustible and combustible pipes and/or cable bundles.

N. Firestop Plug: Intumescent system for sealing the ends of empty or abandoned sleeves with zero percent cable load.

2.4 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

D. Control Voltage, Communications and Electronic Safety and Security Cable Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls and Smoke Barriers: Coordinate calculations of allowable fill ratio with control voltage, communications and electronic safety, and security installers to ensure size of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings can accommodate cable load according to specified conduit fill.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

D. Control Voltage, Communications and Electronic Safety and Security Cable Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls and Smoke Barriers:

1. Where specified mechanical device cannot be used in openings in floors and walls, provide products that allow re-entry and do not cure or dry.

2. Where empty sleeves are installed for future cables or as abandoned cables are harvested, seal both sides of empty sleeves with firestop plug.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" or other text acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) using lettering not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high and with minimum 0.375-inch (9.5-mm) strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet (4.57 m) from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet (9.14 m) measured horizontally along wall or partition.

B. Penetration Identification: Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.



B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 THROUGH-PENETRATION UL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Construction Type of System Penetrated Construction Identification

A. No penetrating Items: F,W,C A,B,J,K,L 0001-0999

B. Metallic Pipes, Conduit or Tubing: F,W,C A,B,J,K,L 1001-1999

C. Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit or Tubing: F,W,C A,B,J,K,L 2001-2999

D. Electric Cables: F,W,C A,B,J,K,L 3001-3999

E. Cable, Trays with Electric Cables: F,W,C A,B,J,K,L 4001-4999

F. Insulated Pipes: F,W,C A,B,J,K,L 5001-5999

G. Electrical Bussduct Penetrations: F,W,C A,B,J,K,L 6001-6999

H. Mechanical Ductwork Penetrations: F,W,C A,B,J,K,L 7001-7999

I. Multiple Penetrations Through Common Openings: F,W,C A,B,J,K,L 8000-8999

J. Control Voltage, Communications and Electronic Safety and Security Cable Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls and Smoke Barriers F, W, C A, B, J, K, L N/A

1. Key to Construction Penetrated

a. F Floor Penetration b. W Wall Penetration c. C Either floor or wall penetration

2. Key to Type of Construction

a. A Concrete floors equal to of less than 5-inches thick b. B Concrete floors greater than 5-inches thick c. J Concrete or masonry walls equal to or less than 8-inches thick d. K Concrete of masonry walls greater than 8-inches thick e. L Framed Walls



JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 1

SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints in smoke barriers.







C. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.


A. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.


a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Specified Technologies, Inc.

2. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling assemblies, and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.

3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed.

C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa).


a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Specified Technologies, Inc.

2. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft. (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at both ambient and elevated temperatures.



D. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.


E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.



2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to

produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of joint edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2393.

B. Where deficiencies are found or joint firestopping systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace joint firestopping systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing joint firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.



PREFORMED JOINT SEALS 079100 - 1

SECTION 079100 - PREFORMED JOINT SEALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preformed, foam joint seals.


A. Product Data: For each preformed joint seal product.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of preformed joint seal required, provide Samples with joint seals in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint seals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PREFORMED, FOAM JOINT SEALS

A. Preformed, Foam Joint Seals (E-2): Manufacturer's standard joint seal manufactured from urethane or EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths based on design criteria indicated, with factory- or field-applied adhesive for bonding to substrates.


a. Basis-of-Design: Balco, Inc.; BCSW. b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; . c. MM Systems Corporation; .

2. Design Criteria:

a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. b. Movement Capability: -20 percent/+20 percent.

3. Joint Seal Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.


A. Primer: Material recommended by preformed-joint-seal manufacturer for joint substrates indicated.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to preformed joint seal manufacturer, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote best adhesion to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with preformed joint seals and surfaces adjacent to joints.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=9397&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456930366&mf=&src=wd




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive preformed joint seals, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting preformed-joint seal performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing preformed joint seals to comply with preformed joint seal manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of preformed joint seal, including dust, paints (except for permanent protective coatings tested and approved for seal adhesion and compatibility by seal manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimal bond with preformed joint seals. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint seals. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by preformed joint seal manufacturer or as indicated by tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint seal manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint seal bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of adhesive or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with preformed joint seal manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Installation of Preformed, Foam Joint Seals:

1. Install each length of seal immediately after removing protective wrapping.



2. Firmly secure compressed joint seals to joint gap side to obtain full bond using exposed pressure-sensitive adhesive or field-applied adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.

3. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at splices, ends, turns, and intersections of joints.

4. For applications at low ambient temperatures, heat foam joint seal material in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect preformed joint seals from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so seals are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated seals immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants. 3. Immersible joint sealants. 4. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.




A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.



C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

C. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected.



4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from a single source from a single manufacturer.

C. VOC Content: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following:

1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250

g/L or less. 3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775

g/L or less.

D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning®Contractors Concrete Sealant. b. Soudal USA; RTV 50.

2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248.

B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning® 790 Silicone Building Sealant.

2.4 IMMERSIBLE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Polysulfide, Immersible, M, NS, 25, NT, I: Immersible, multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, polysulfide joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT and I.


a. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-275 Multi-Component Polysulfide Sealant.

2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.





B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; DOW CORNING® 786 SILICONE SEALANT -. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; SCS1700

Sanitary. c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation; Bondaflex Sil 100

WF. d. Soudal USA; RTV GP. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.

2.6 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation; Bondaflex 600. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); 850A Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk.

2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.


a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems; MasterSeal 920 & 921(Pre-2014: Sonolastic Backer Rod).

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

1. Use Type O on interior joint of double sealant joints only.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Exterior insulation and finish systems.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.



1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application,

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on

Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.



5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-#1.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints between different materials listed above. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant - Silicone:

a. Single-Component:

1) Non-Sag: Silicone, S, NS, 50, T, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water immersion JS-#2.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints in greenhouses and areas subject to wetting, including but not limited to formed concrete drain troughs.

2. Joint Sealant: Polysulfide, Immersible, M, NS, 25, T, NT, I. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#3.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between metal panels. d. Joints between different materials listed above.



e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and louvers.

f. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. g. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.


a. Single Component:

1) Non-Staining: Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT.


D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#4.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry, concrete walls and partitions. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.


a. Single-Component:

1) Non-Sag: Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT.


E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement JS-#5.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors

andwindows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#6.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems.


A. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.


1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content and cost.

2. Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate sustainability report for each manufacturer.

C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control

systems, and security systems. 7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 8. Details of accessories. 9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 10. Indicate glazing materials, including fire-rated glazing.

D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.




A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. 2. Inspect on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished

items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Mesker Door Inc. 3. Republic Doors and Frames. 4. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of hollow metal doors and frames for not less than 5 years.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 orUL 10C, Category A positive pressure fire doors.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.



B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies and Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Standard Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. f. Core: Kraft-paper honeycomb or Polystyrene.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

b. Sidelite Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. c. Construction: Face welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches c. Face: Metallic-coated cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch,

with minimum A40 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. f. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material

as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. g. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of

same material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.

h. Core: Polyurethane.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with minimum A40 coating.

b. Construction: Face welded.



4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.5 BORROWED LITES

A. Fabricate of uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

B. Construction: Face welded.

C. Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as metal as frames.

D. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

4. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

5. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

C. Material: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.



F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 2. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures, except provide

flush closures at exterior doors of same material as face sheets. 3. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of

same material as face sheets. 4. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit

moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 5. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where

required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.



4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.

5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised and electric hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

3. In accordance with NFPA 80, Section 4.1.3, field modifications of mortised and electric hardware not acceptable.

F. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.

2. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with [beveled] [square] stops unless otherwise indicated.

3. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

4. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames.

5. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 6. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation

types indicated. 7. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced

uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.



C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber

insulation. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions.



8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with SDI A250.8.

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with medium-density-overlay faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.



2. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs. 3. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor. 4. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. 5. Product Data: For composite wood products, indicating that product contains no urea

formaldehyde.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Undercuts. 4. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 5. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 6. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.


1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish.

2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.



D. Store doors flat on level raised platforms in clean, dry, well ventilated area protected from sunlight and weather. Cover but allow for air circulation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 4. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 5. VT Industries Inc.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

2. Provide WI-Certified Compliance Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

B. Regional Materials: Wood doors shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

C. Certified Wood: Wood doors shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.



D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

E. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde.

F. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

3. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

4. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

5. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

6. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals.

a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel same color as doors. b. Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices).

G. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.

H. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2 , made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

2. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

I. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

a. Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10.



2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Faces: Medium-density overlay .

a. Apply medium-density overlay to standard-thickness, closed-grain, hardwood face veneers or directly to high-density hardboard crossbands.

3. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood. 4. Core: Particleboard. 5. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive

planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied, including drilling pilot holes for hinge screws and lock fronts. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

3. Factory prepare doors receiving templated mortised and electric hardware in accordance with Door Hardware Schedule. Field modification of mortised and electric hardware not acceptable in accordance with NFPA 80, Section 4.1.3.

C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.

D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Finish doors at factory.



C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.

D. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.

E. Opaque Finish:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: WDMA OP-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Color: Custom color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for ribbon walls. 3. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."




A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems.


1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Product Data for Recycled Content - Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Submit product data

stating the percentage and cost of post-consumer and pre-consumer (post-industrial) recycled content by weight.

3. Product Data for Regional Materials - Credit MR 5.1 and MR 5.2: Submit a statement from aluminum manufacturer stating the distance between the place of extraction, harvesting, recovery and manufacturing and the Project location and the percentage by weight.

C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.

2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.

3. Provide signature and seal by a structural engineer licensed in the State of Missouri stating compliance with Performance Requirements specified above.

4. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.



084113 - 2

5. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variation, include sample sets demonstrating full range of expected variation.

E. Other Action Submittals:

1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Include design calculations.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and field testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

C. Performance Certification: Submit written certification, signed by entrance and storefront system manufacturer, attesting that the entrance and storefront system installed conforms to the requirements specified in the “Performance Requirements” article above and that the manufacturer's standard system has been tested in accordance with specified tests, meeting all specified requirements.

1. Where testing has not been accomplished, perform specified testing using an acceptable testing laboratory or agency and provide certified test results.

2. Submit a separate certification for thermal performance.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

F. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Sample Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.



084113 - 3

B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed storefront to include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for post-installation-phase quality-control program.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

D. Quality-Control Program for Structural-Sealant-Glazed System: Develop quality control program specifically for Project. Document quality-control procedures and verify results for aluminum-framed systems. Comply with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, system material-qualification procedures, preconstruction sealant-testing program, procedures for system fabrication and installation, and intervals of reviews and checks.

E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

F. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility with and adhesion of each material that will come in contact with sealants and each condition required by aluminum-framed systems.

1. Test a minimum five samples each of metal, glazing, and other material. 2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed systems. 3. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each

material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including, but not limited to, specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number of samples required for each material, retest materials.

G. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines andICC/ANSI A117.1.

H. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401, "Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing" for design and installation of storefront systems.

I. Structural-Sealant Joints: Design reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer.

J. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."



084113 - 4


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements to glazing. d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. e. Glass breakage



084113 - 5

f. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. g. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. h. Sealant failure. i. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch.

E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.

F. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

2. Vertical Interstory Movement: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.7 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

G. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

2. Entrance Doors:

a. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..



084113 - 6

H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft..

I. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than12 lbf/sq. ft..

1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes.

J. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,

anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F.

b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F. c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.

K. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 60 as determined according to NFRC 500.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:

a. EGS-1: EFCO 600R 2-1/4 x 6 inch Ribbon Wall Systems. b. EGS-2: EFCO 945 Quick Set 2-1/4 x 4-1/2 inch Thermal Storefront Ribbon

System. c. IGS-1: EFCO 401 1-3/4 x 4-1/2 inches non-thermally broken. This is interior

only, does not need to meet thermal and water performance criteria. d. or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 2) Oldcastle Building Envelope 3) United States Aluminum. 4) YKK AP America Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.



084113 - 7

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. 6. Recycled Content of Aluminum Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half

of preconsumer recycled content not less than 20 percent. 7. Regional Materials: To the greatest extent possible, provide aluminum that has been

extracted, harvested or recovered and manufactured within 500 miles of the Project.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken, except IGS-1. 2. Glazing System: Retained by structural sealant at vertical edges and mechanically with

gaskets at horizontal and perimeter edges, except IGS-1. 3. Glazing Plane: Front. 4. Finish: High-performance organic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.5 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.



084113 - 8

D. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated.

a. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use.

a. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. b. Color: Matching structural sealant.

2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors – Aluminum-Framed Glass Panel: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Entrance Door Hardware: All standard door hardware by storefront manufacturer, sets as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

a. Provide hardened steel threaded inserts equivalent to “Nutserts” for fasteners that are exposed to shear forces.

3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system.

B. Trim Pieces: Provide custom extruded or back-cut and mitered aluminum trim pieces as indicated on the drawings.



084113 - 9

C. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer.

E. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

G. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and entrance and storefront framing, provide systems of type and ratings indicated on Drawings and complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section “Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.”

1. Provide integrity ratings equal to, or exceeding, fire-resistance rating of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint and having the required joint width and movement classification and L-rating.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

F. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system or screw-spline system.



084113 - 10

G. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install

three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

H. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

I. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

J. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3 -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Custom colors (two) as selected by Architect.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate structural-sealant-glazed systems.

B. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Systems: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations, including, but not limited to, system material-qualification procedures, sealant testing, and system fabrication reviews and checks.

C. Structural-sealant-glazed system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.



084113 - 11

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 6. Seal perimeter and joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and as required to ensure entrance and storefront system complies with Performance Requirements specified above in Part 1.

1. Structural-Sealant Glazing:

a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.


A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length.

2. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 4. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.



084113 - 12

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

d. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.

B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements.

1. Structural-Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Structural sealant shall be tested according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401.

a. Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," in ASTM C 1401, Appendix X2, shall be used.

1) A minimum of six areas on each building face shall be tested. 2) Repair installation areas damaged by testing.

2. Structural-Sealant Glazing Inspection: After installation of aluminum-framed systems is complete, structural-sealant glazing shall be inspected and evaluated according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401.

3. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft., of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

4. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 4.18 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration.

5. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a

3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.



DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Automatic operators. 4. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Interior Aluminum Doors and Frames”. 4. Division 08 Section “Automatic Door Operators”. 5. Division 08 Section “Access Control Hardware”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 – Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and

Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors. 8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans

and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:

a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings.

b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.

2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.



D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

E. Informational Submittals:

1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.

2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.



G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.

2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures

H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Five years for exit hardware. 2. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. 3. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.



2.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.

1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for

every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:

a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.

b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.

4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings:

a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hager Companies (HA). b. Ives (IV). c. McKinney Products (MK).

2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES

A. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.


a. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series. b. Stanley Hardware (ST) EPT-12C Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - EPT-10 Series.



2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM

A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.

1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor.

2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.

listed for windstorm components where applicable. 4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required

for appropriate installation and operation.


a. Door Controls International (DC). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.

1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.

2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.

3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.

4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.


a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be

flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: SFIC, construction keyed, permanent cores by owner.



D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following:

1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders.

E. Keying System:

1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements.

2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner.

3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing system.

F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

G. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.

H. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.

I. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project.


a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK).

2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 certified.

1. Furnish with solid cast levers, standard 2 3/4” backset, and 1/2" (3/4" at rated paired openings) throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt.

2. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – CL3300 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 10 Line. c. Schlage (SC) – ND Series. d. Stanley Best (BE) – 9K Series.



2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for

aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for

rescue hardware applications.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.

3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5. Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in hardware sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current.

6. Motorized Electric Latch Retraction: Devices with an electric latch retraction feature must use motors which have a maximum current draw of 600mA. Solenoid driven latch retraction is not acceptable.



7. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.

b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

8. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.

9. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.

10. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.

11. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.

12. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 XP Series.

2.9 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.



6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install

closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series. b. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series. c. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 9500 Series. d. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 281 Series.

2.10 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim

1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.

4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:

a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.

5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.





2.11 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.



2.12 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.

1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

2.13 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES

A. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels.




a. Security Door Controls (SD) - DPS Series. b. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series.

B. Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC (field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment.


a. Von Duprin (VD) - PS.

2.14 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.15 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.

1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.


A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.



B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

1. MK - McKinney

2. IV - Ives

3. RO - Rockwood

4. VD - Von Duprin

5. BE - Stanley Security Solutions Inc (BE)

6. AD - Adams Rite

7. LC - LCN Closers

8. PE - Pemko

9. NG - National Guard

10. SU - Securitron

Hardware Sets

Set: 1.0

Doors: G1015, G1016, G1017, G1018, G1019, G1020, G1021, G1022, G1023, G1024, G1025, G1026, G1027, G1028, G1029, G1030, G1031, G1032, G1060, G1061, G1062, G1063, G1064, G1065

Description: Interior Greenhouse Doors

1 Classroom Lock 9K37R 14D 626 BE

1 Door Closer 4040XP SRI CUSH AL LC

1 Balance of Hardware by Door Mfr. OT

Notes: All hardware by Greenhouse Mfr. Door closer mounting accessories as required.

https://www.openingsstudio.com/AAOS/AAOS/CutSheetViewer.jsp?IDS=88791914,43471644,43471645,

https://www.openingsstudio.com/AAOS/AAOS/CutSheetViewer.jsp?IDS=77435032,



Set: 2.0

Doors: GC1015A, GC1027A, GC1060A

Description: Exterior Greenhouse Doors - Exit Only

1 Cylindrical Lock (exit only) 9K30Y 14D 626 BE



Notes: All hardware by Greenhouse Mfr. Door closer mounting accessories as required.

Set: 3.0

Doors: XC1035A

Description: Exterior HM Egress x EAC

4 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3386 NRP US32D MK

1 Storeroom Lock 9K37D 14D 626 BE

1 Electric Strike 6211 DS SO-24 US32D VD


1 Kick Plate K1050 10" H x BEV x CSK US32D RO

1 Threshold 253x3AFG PE

1 Rain Guard 346C PE

1 Sweep 101VA NG

1 Gasketing 303AV PE

1 Credential Reader by Div. 28 OT

1 Wiring Diagram(s) by Mfr. OT

1 Position Switch DPS-M-GY SU

1 Power Supply PS902 x options req'd VD

Notes: Entry when locked by valid credential at reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times. Door position switch(es) to monitor opening status. Readers, controllers, software and credentials by Div 28. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.



https://www.openingsstudio.com/AAOS/AAOS/CutSheetViewer.jsp?IDS=153428460,134325276,














Set: 4.0

Doors: X1014A

Description: Exterior Pair x EAC x Auto-Door Operator


1 Dust Proof Strike DP2 626 IV

1 Flush Bolt 2845/2945 as req'd US26D RO

1 Rim Exit Device 99NL-OP US26D VD

1 Cylinder, rim 1E-72 626 BE

1 Electric Strike 6121 DS US32D VD

2 Door Pull TBF157 US32D RO

1 Coordinator 2672 x Fb x Closer Brkts Black RO

1 Door Closer 4040XP SRI SHCUSH AL LC

1 Door Operator 4642 REG AL LC

2 Armor Plate K1050 34" H x BEV x CSK US32D RO

1 Electric Power Transfer EPT10 SP28 VD



2 Touchless Actuator 8310-813 LC



1 Metal Edge Astragal by Door Mfr. OT

Notes: Entry when locked by valid credential at reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times. Auto-operator function: Valid credential at reader to bring "touchless" actuator switches on-line. Door position switch(es) to monitor opening status. Readers, controllers, software and credentials by Div 28. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.

Set: 5.0

Doors: 1014

Description: Interior Pair - Push/Pull x Auto-Door Operator


2 Push Plate 70C-RKW US32D RO

2 Pull Plate BF 111x70C US32D RO




2 Silencer 608/608CA RO


Notes: Auto-operator function: By "touchless" actuator switches on-line.




























Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.

Set: 6.0

Doors: XC1001B

Description: Exterior Aluminum Storefront Pair x EAC x Auto-Door Operator


1 Electric Latch Conc Vert Rod CD QEL RX 3347A-NL-OP US26D VD

1 Concealed Vert Rod Exit CD 3347A-EO US26D VD


2 Door Pull TBF157 US32D RO



1 Seals, Sweeps & Astragals by Aluminum Door Mfr. OT

1 Electric Power Transfer EPT10 SP28 VD





1 Power Supply PS914 VD

Notes: Entry when locked by valid credential at reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times. Auto-operator function: Valid credential at reader to bring "touchless" actuator switches on-line. Door position switch(es) to monitor opening status. Readers, controllers, software and credentials by Div 28. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.

Set: 7.0

Doors: XC1001A

Description: Interior Aluminum Storefront Pair x Auto-Door Operator



2 Push Bar & Pull BF15747 US32D RO



1 Seals, Sweeps & Astragals by Aluminum Door Mfr. OT


Notes: Auto-operator function: By "touchless" actuator switches on-line. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors. Door closer mounting accessories as required.




















Set: 8.0

Doors: 1001

Description: Passage Function

4 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3386 US32D MK

1 Passage Set 9K30N 14D 626 BE

1 Door Closer 4040XP SRI REG AL LC

1 Door Stop 406/409/441CU US26D RO

Notes: Door closer mounting accessories as required.

Set: 9.0

Doors: X1057A

Description: Exterior Pair - Exit Only


1 Flush Bolt FB458 626 IV

1 Cylindrical Lock (exit only) 9K30Y 14D 626 BE





2 Sweep 101VA NG




Notes: Door position switch(es) to monitor opening status. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.

Set: 10.0

Doors: XC1035

Description: Exterior HM - Keyed Both Sides


1 Dbl Storeroom Lock 9K37G 14D 626 BE





1 Sweep 101VA NG






























Notes: Door position switch(es) to monitor opening status. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.

Set: 11.0

Doors: XC1015, XC1027, XC1060

Description: Egress Pair - Passage Function


2 Concealed Vert Rod Exit 9947L-BE LBR 996L-BE US26D VD

2 Door Closer 4040XP SRI EDA AL LC


1 Gasketing S88 PE

1 Astragal 125NA(SET) NG

Set: 12.0

Doors: 1046

Description: Egress Pair - Classroom Function


2 Surface Vert Rod Exit 9927L LBR 996L(Std) US26D VD





Set: 13.0

Doors: 1033

Description: Office Function


1 Entry Lock 9K37AB 14D 626 BE



Set: 14.0

Doors: 1038, 1039

Description: Privacy Function


1 Privacy Set 9K30L 14D 626 BE


1 Gasketing S88 PE


























Set: 15.0

Doors: 1044, 1055, X1046A

Description: Classroom Function x Door Closer







Set: 16.0

Doors: 1054A, 1057

Description: Classroom Function Pair




1 Door Closer 4040XP SRI HEDA AL LC





Set: 16.1

Doors: 1035, 1040, 1042, 1054

Description: Classroom Function Pair x Closer w/ Stop

Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3386 NRP US32D MK

Flush Bolt FB458 626 IV

Classroom Lock 9K37R 14D 626 BE

Door Closer 4040XP SRI SHCUSH AL LC

Kick Plate K1050 10" H x BEV x CSK US32D RO

Door Stop 406/409/441CU US26D RO

Astragal 125NA(SET) NG

Silencer 608/608CA RO


































Set: 17.0

Doors: 1036

Description: Storeroom Function





Set: 18.0

Doors: 1010, 1043

Description: Storeroom Function Pair




2 Surf Overhead Stop 9-X36 652 RF


1 Gasketing S88 PE

2 Door Bottom 220NA NG


Notes: MOUNT OVERHEAD STOP OPPOSITE CLOSER TO AVOID MOUNTING CONFLICTS.

Set: 19.0

Doors: 1042A

Description: Passage Function Pair




1 Surf Overhead Stop 9-X36 652 RF

1 Gasketing S88 PE


Notes: Overhead stop on active leaf only. If 180 deg swing required, use 409 Wall Stop.

























Set: 20.0

Doors: 1035A

Description: Passage Function Pair x Seals





1 Gasketing S88 PE

2 Door Bottom 220NA NG


Set: 21.0

Doors: 1011, 1041

Description: Access Control Function - IT Rooms



1 Electric Strike 6211 DS SO-24 US32D VD



1 Gasketing S88 PE




Notes: Entry when locked by valid credential at reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times. Readers, controllers, software and credentials by Div 28. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.

Set: 22.0

Doors: 1034, 1037

Description: Push/Pull Function


1 Push Plate 70C-RKW US32D RO

1 Pull Plate BF 111x70C US32D RO



1 Gasketing S88 PE



























Set: 23.0

Doors: X1013A, X1058A

Description: Electrical Room Egress Pair


1 Mullion KR4954 SP28 VD

1 Fire Rated Rim Exit 99L-F 996L(Std) US26D VD

1 Fire Rated Rim Exit 99EO-F US26D VD

1 Cylinder, mortise 1E-74 626 BE


2 Door Closer 4040XP SRI EDA AL LC


1 Gasketing S88 PE

Set: 24.0

Doors: 1013, 1058

Description: Electrical Room Egress


1 Fire Rated Rim Exit 99L-F 996L(Std) US26D VD



1 Gasketing S88 PE

Set: 25.0

Doors: XG1, XG2

Description: Cooler Doors / Misc





















GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

a. Doors. b. Storefront framing. c. Glazed entrances. d. Interior borrowed lites.

2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.




2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.


1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Product Data for Recycled Content - Credit MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Submit product data

stating the percentage and cost of post-consumer and pre-consumer (post-industrial) recycled content by weight.

3. Product Data for Regional Materials - Credit MR 5.1 and MR 5.2: Submit a statement from glass and glazing manufacturer stating the distance between the place of extraction, harvesting, recovery and manufacturing and the Project location and the percentage by weight.

C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

1. Insulating glass.


GLAZING 088000 - 2

D. Glazing Accessory Samples: For colored spacers, in 12-inch lengths.

E. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings..

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-e coatings.

B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulating glass .

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.



GLAZING 088000 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ICC's International Building Code by a qualified professional engineer.

C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design

glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass

deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.

4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

D. Safety Glazing: Provide safety glazing at all locations indicated by chapter 24 of the International Building Code, whether indicated on the drawings or not.

E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."


GLAZING 088000 - 4

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

E. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

F. Recycled Content of Glass and Glazing Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 20 percent.

G. Regional Materials: To the greatest extent possible, provide glass and glazing products that have been extracted, harvested or recovered and manufactured within 500 miles of the Project.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2. Maximum peak to valley rollerwave 0.003 in the central area and 0.008 inch within 10.5 inch of the leading and trailing edge.

3. For clear or low-iron glass ≥ 5mm thick without ceramic frit or ink, maximum + or œ 125 mD (millidiopter) over 95% of the glass surface.

4. Maximum bow and warp 1/32 inch per lineal foot. 5. All tempered architectural safety glass shall conform with ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR

1201.

C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I; Class I (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated; Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2. Maximum peak to valley rollerwave 0.003 in the central area and 0.008 inch within 10.5 inch of the leading and trailing edge.

3. For clear or low-iron glass ≥ 5mm thick without ceramic frit or ink, maximum + or Ó 125 mD (millidiopter) over 95% of the glass surface.

4. Maximum bow and warp 1/32 inch per lineal foot. 5. All tempered architectural safety glass shall conform with ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR

1201.


GLAZING 088000 - 5

D. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: Heat-treated float glass, Condition C; with ceramic enamel applied by silk-screened process; complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's Tempering Division's "Engineering Standards Manual" and with other requirements specified.

1. Ceramic Coating Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.5 INSULATING GLASS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products the following or an Architect approved equivalent:

1. Viracon.

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Insulating glass shall have double edge seals. Primary seal shall be extruded polyisobutylene continuously bonded to glass surfaces and metal spacer, including corners. Minimum width of primary seal shall be 0.062 inch. Secondary seal shall be Momentive IGS 3723 or Dow Corning 982. Secondary seal shall completely cover spacer with no gaps or voids, and shall be continuously bonded to both plates of glass. Unfilled spaces between primary and secondary seals shall not exceed 3/32 inch wide. At least 50 percent of spacer internal volume shall contain desiccant. All desiccant may be at two sides of unit. Where insulating glass is supported by structural silicone, secondary seal shall be designed to transfer specified pressures from outdoor glass to indoor glass. Insulating glass shall be qualified to ASTM 2190. Each unit shall be labeled to IGCC minimum label requirements.

2. Spacer: Aluminum with black, color anodic finish . 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article and in "Insulating-Laminated-Glass Types" Article.

2.6 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from the following:

1. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned silicone gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.


GLAZING 088000 - 6

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 790 Silicone Building Sealant. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; SilPruf LM

SCS2700. c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation; Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation; 890NST. e. Sika Corporation; SikaSil WS-290. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

2.8 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a

full bead of liquid sealant.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.


GLAZING 088000 - 7

2.10 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

D. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade tempered glass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Inspect each glass unit immediately before installation. Do not install units with edge damage or face imperfections.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

1. Where glass is installed in other building components, comply with requirements of component manufacturer for installation of glass in the applicable building component.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.


GLAZING 088000 - 8

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.


GLAZING 088000 - 9

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape where fixed stop is located on exterior.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. Where sealant is indicated with gaskets, slightly recess gasket to receive sealant.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate air pockets and voids, other than expansion voids, and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

D. Promptly after installation, clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass, stops and frames and eliminate stains and discolorations.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


GLAZING 088000 - 10

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.8 MONOLITHIC-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

3.9 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type GLE-1: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon VNE 1-63. On a portion of the #2 surface, provide gray Viraspan ceramic frit #5006 V908. Refer to drawings for location of frit.

2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered or Heat-strengthened float glass as required by

performance requirements. 5. Interspace Content: Air. 6. Spacer: Black anodized aluminum. 7. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered or Heat-strengthened float glass as required by

performance requirements. 8. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 9. Visible Light Transmittance: 53 percent minimum. 10. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 11. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.26 maximum. 12. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.25 maximum. 13. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Glass Type GLE-2: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon VNE 1-63. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered or Heat-strengthened float glass as required by

performance requirements. 5. Interspace Content: Air. 6. Spacer: Black anodized aluminum. 7. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered or Heat-strengthened float glass as required by

performance requirements. 8. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 9. Visible Light Transmittance: 62 percent minimum. 10. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.25 maximum. 11. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.21 maximum. 12. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.28 maximum. 13. Provide safety glazing labeling.



MIRRORS 088300 - 1

SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:

1. Film-backed glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.



1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment details.

C. Samples: For each type of the following:

1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. 2. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic.


A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.


MIRRORS 088300 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company. 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.

2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process.

B. Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Select Quality, clear.

1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.

C. Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed mirrors, provide products that comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE

A. Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover edges of mirrors in a single piece.

1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.05 inch.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Standard "J" Channel. 2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Shallow Nose "J"

Moulding Lower Bar.

2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.05 inch.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Deep "J" Channel.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=184&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd









MIRRORS 088300 - 3

2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar.

3. Finish: Clear bright anodized.

B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.

C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield, expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible.

B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished.

1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.

D. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint, as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer, to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes or primers with mirror mastic.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.


MIRRORS 088300 - 4

C. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.

1. Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom channel.

2. Install mastic as follows:

a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.

b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.


A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer.



FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 1

SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal).

C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are vertical).

D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.

E. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.



1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.



1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.




A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.

B. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project is indicated on the drawings.


C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.


E. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Airolite Company, LLC (the); SCH601 with fully recessed mullions or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. b. Nystrom, Inc. c. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.

2. Louver Depth: 6 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than 7.5 sq. ft. for 48-inch- wide by 48-inch- high louver. b. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when

subjected to a rainfall rate of 3 inches per hour and a wind speed of 29 mph at a core-area intake velocity of 650 fpm.

5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

6. Head and Sill Flashing: Minimum 0.060 inch aluminum, color to match louver finish.

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening except where insect screening is indicated.







B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.

2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inchwire. 2. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012-inchwire.

2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS

A. Insulated, Blank-Off Panels: Laminated panels consisting of an insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets and attached to back of louver.

1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch nominal thickness. 3. Insulating Core: Rigid, glass-fiber-board insulation. 4. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's

standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames, not less than 0.080-inchnominal thickness, with corners mitered and with same finish as panels.

5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with gaskets or sealant. 6. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.



1. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated.

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.

1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

2. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered blades with concealed close-fitting splices and with fully recessed mullions at corners.

G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Custom color to match hollow metal doors on same side of building these louvers are located.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.



C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.


A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.



B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Submit documentation indicating structural review and analysis, signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Certifications: Provide Manufacturer Certification specified in "Steel Framing for Framed Assemblies" article in Part 2 below.

B. Evaluation Reports: For embossed steel studs and tracks firestop tracks and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Steel Framing Industry Association.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage qualified professional engineer as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" and as follows to design non-structural metal framing.

1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by qualified professional engineer.

2. Professional Engineer Qualifications: professional engineer legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated and defined as those performed for installations of non-structural metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.



B. Structural Performance: Provide non-structural metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As follows:

a. Dead Loads: Weights of materials and construction. b. Live Loads: 5 psf. c. Seismic Loads: Comply with Seismic Design Category "D".

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

D. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

E. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

F. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Design Values:

a. Deflection Limit: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:

1) L/240 unless otherwise noted. 2) L/360 where Level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated, at tile backing panels,

where plaster veneer is indicated, and elsewhere as indicated.

b. Lateral Pressure:

1) 5.0 psf (240 Pa) unless otherwise noted. 2) 7.5 psf (360 Pa) at all shaft enclosures penetrating one or more floors,

elevator enclosures, pressurized plenums, entrance lobbies and vestibules with automatic entrances, and elsewhere as noted.

3) 10 psf (480 Pa) at stair enclosures.

2. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. EQ coatings not acceptable.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter.

D. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0329 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.



E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) unless noted otherwise.

2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm).

3. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension or 650/670 Fire

Rated Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System or Wall-to-Wall Drywall Suspension

System.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Tracks

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following manufacturer] [provide products by one of the following manufacturers] [acceptable manufacturers include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) MBA Building Supplies. 3) Phillips Manufacturing Co.

b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm). c. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) unless noted otherwise.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide [one of] the following:

1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to tracks while allowing 2-inch (51-mm) minimum vertical movement.


1) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; FTC5. 2) Fire Trak Corp; RediKlip. 3) Steel Network, Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.

2. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.



3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.


1) Blazeframe Industries; Bare Slotted Track (BST/BST 2). 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 3) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track. 4) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series.

C. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Blazeframe Industries; Intumescent Framing, Fire Stop System. b. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; BlazeFrame. c. Steel Network, Inc. (The); VertiTrack VT.

D. Metal Back-Up Plates : Minimum thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) galvanized steel plates of sizes and configurations detailed, or if not detailed, as required to accommodate the wall hung casework, millwork, railings or other items mounted to metal stud and wallboard walls and partitions.

1. Provide plates designed, and certified, to support an imposed load of 250 lbs. per linear foot (113 kg per 30 cm) for handrails, grab bars and other ADA-compliant items. Provide plates designed, and certified, to support an imposed load of 144 lbs. per linear foot (65 kg per 30 cm) for all other items. All loads required above are in addition to the weight of the item supported by the back-up plate.

2. Provide plates designed for screw-attachment to steel studs with back-up plate faces flush with face of studs or overlapping face of studs with pre-cut notches matching stud spacing.

3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products or an acceptable equivalent product:

a. Metal-Lite. Inc.; Flush Mount or Notch-Tite. b. Bailey Metal Products Limited; Baily Backer Bar.

E. Television/Monitor Mounting Plates: Minimum 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) thick steel plates fabricated in sizes and configuration detailed to accommodate wall hung television/monitor brackets. Locate where indicated on Drawings. If plates are not indicated on Drawings, provide in locations selected by Owner.

1. Verify load and attachment requirements and fabricate accordingly.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch-

(1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel.

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.




a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; RC Deluxe. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC; Resilient Furring Channel (RC-1).

2. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

1. Comply with details indicated. Install metal back-up plates in accordance with plate manufacturer’s written instructions using self-tapping pan-head screws of type and in quantity required by manufacturer to achieve full load capacity.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.



3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacing indicated, but not greater than spacing required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.



C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along

arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.

1.2 SUBMITTALS





3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, indicating VOC content.

1.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.



1. Marking Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Apply hourly rating text in 4-inch high red numbers and black Arial font letters at maximum 10 feet between rating text applications as measured from beginning of one text application to end of next text application extending from one end of fire-resistance-rated wall to opposite end of fire-resistance-rated wall, located 6 inches above finished ceiling to bottom of text. Provide following hourly rating text as applicable to wall:

a. 1 HR b. 2 HR c. 3 HR d. 4 HR e. 1 HR Fire/Smoke f. 2 HR Fire/Smoke

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD

A. Regional Materials: Products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


a. American Gypsum; FireBloc® Type X Gypsum Wallboard. b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Type X. c. Georgia-Pacific Building Products; ToughRock Fireguard Gypsum Board d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Wallboard. e. United States Gypsum Company; USG Sheetrock®Brand Firecode®X Gypsum

Panels.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M.


a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc® IR Type X Wallboard. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus Impact-Resistant Panel. c. National Gypsum Company; Hi-Impact Brand XP Fire-Shield Wallboard. d. United States Gypsum Company; USG Sheetrock®Brand Mold Tough®VHI (Very

High Impact) Firecode® Core.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Surface Abrasion: Meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements. 4. Surface Indentation: Meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 5. Single-Drop Soft-Body Impact: Meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements.



6. Hard-Body Impact: Meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements according to test in Annex A1.

7. Long Edges: Tapered. 8. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following]:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; FiberCement BackerBoard. b. National Gypsum Company; PermaBase BRAND Cement Board. c. United States Gypsum Company; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless noted otherwise. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Plastic by Trim-Tex Drywall Products unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.

B. Corner Guard: Where corner guards are indicated, use Certainteed NO-COAT Structural Laminate Drywall Corner System.

1. Product: ULTRATRIM OUTSIDE 90.

2.7 JOINT TREATMENT AND FINISH MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.



5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Hilti, Inc.; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. c. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. d. United States Gypsum Company; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling/soffit panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.



C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

H. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

I. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

1. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

K. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide marking of fire-resistance-rated assemblies as specified in Performance Requirements article in Part 2 of this Section.

L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer or referenced standards.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Impact-Resistant Type: In all corridors and as indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.



2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Offset seams a minimum of 16 inches, but directly over framing. In no instances shall seams of gypsum board be installed directly above another.

5. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

E. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 at locations indicated on Drawings and as follows:

1. Install where a partition, wall, or ceiling traverses a construction joint (expansion, seismic or building control element) in the base building structure.

2. Install where movement may occur at joints in a wall or partition supported by building systems that move differentially.

3. Install where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear ft .

4. Install in interior ceilings with perimeter relief so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 ft and total area between control joints does not exceed 2500 sq ft .

5. Install in interior ceilings without perimeter relief so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 ft and total area between control joints does not exceed 900 sq ft .

6. Install in exterior ceilings and soffits so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 ft and total area between control joints does not exceed 900 sq ft .

7. Install where ceiling framing members change direction. 8. Install at one side of door frames. Full height door frames shall be considered

equivalent to a control joint. 9. Install all control joints at specific locations approved by the Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.

4. Level 5: For surfaces to receive gloss finish, dry erase coatings and where indicated on Drawings.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected.



1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation.

2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings:

a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation. b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. c. Installation of air-duct systems. d. Installation of air devices. e. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing. f. Installation of ceiling support framing.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1

SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain tile. 2. Metal edge strips. 3. Sloped transitions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.




1. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.


1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers.




A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain waterproof membrane crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer:

1. Waterproof membrane. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Metal edge strips.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.



1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile Type: porcelain tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product approved by the Architect prior to bidding.

2. Face Size: As indicated in Finish Schedule. 3. Thickness: As indicated in Finish Schedule. 4. Face: Pattern of design indicated in Finish Schedule.

5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish Schedule.

6. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Ardex Americas. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation.

3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

4. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin liquid-latex additive at Project site.

5. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEI Corporation.

3. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F (60 and 100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.




A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness,; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Seriesexposed-edge material.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Basis-of-Design: Schluter Systems L.P. Jolly – color coated aluminum.

C. Floor Transition: Solid surface sloped edge as shown on the drawings. Height to match tile and setting bed thickness.

2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.



B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Exterior tile floors. b. Tile floors in wet areas. c. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. d. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.



1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

J. Sloped Transition: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets concrete flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.

K. Metal Edge Strips: Install on walls at outside corners.


A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floors, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Thinset Installations:

a. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F113; thinset mortar.

1) Thinset Mortar: LHT, latex- portland cement mortar. 2) Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.

B. Interior Walls, Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Thinset Installations:

a. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board .

1) Ceramic Tile Type:. 2) Thinset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. 3) Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed attachment systems for interior ceilings.

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.







C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:

1. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

2. Pucks: Full-size clips.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product approved by the Architect.

B. Core: 6-7 pcf fiberglass.

C. Thickness: minimum 1 inch or as indicated in the legend.

D. Facing: Scrim fiber capable of being painted with latex paint and not affecting acoustical properties.

E. Edges: Square and painted.

F. Mounting: Direct mount using pucks directly mounted through panel and into steel deck. Puck to be painted to match panel.

G. Color: As indicated in the legend.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings

B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.




RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."



2.2 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on the finish Legend or comparable product approved by the Architect.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring or concrete.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.

H. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=7586&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd



3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 2. Label each coat of each Sample. 3. Draw-Down Samples: Provide 3 “draw-down” samples of each specified sheen, color and

finish.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

B. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each product by color and finish was used, product data pages, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings; PPG Paints 3. Sherwin-Williams Company. 4. Rust-Oleum

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in ”Exterior Painting Schedule” article in Part 3 below for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits as referenced in Section 018113 – Sustainable Design Requirements.

C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations and MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual as applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.



B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood

filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door

frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,

performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or

factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.



D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Stained Wood:

1. Acrylic Latex Systems: Two coats.

a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Arborcoat Transparent Deck and Siding Stain 637. b. PPG Architectural Coatings; PPG Paints: Sun-Proof Deck, Fence, Siding Semi-

Transparent Acrylic Stain, 77 1460. c. Sherwin-Williams Company: Woodscapes House Stain Exterior Polyurethane Semi-

Transparent Stain A15T5. d. Rust-Oleum: Wolman Dura Stain Semi Transparent Acrylic Stain

B. Ferrous Metal:

1. Semi-Gloss Sheen:

a. Benjamin Moore & Co.:

1) Primer (Unpainted Surfaces): SUPER SPEC HP Acrylic Metal Primer P04.



2) First and Second Coats: SuperSpec Acrylic Latex Semigloss #170.

b. PPG Architectural Coatings; PPG Paints:

1) Primer (Unpainted Surfaces): Pitt-Tech Plus WB Industrial DTM Metal Primer 90-912.

2) First and Second Coats: Pitt Tech Plus 90-1210 Semi-Gloss DTM Enamel.

c. Sherwin-Williams Company:

1) Primer (Unpainted Surfaces): DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish, B66W1. 2) First and Second Coats: Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Coating S/G B66-1151

Series.

d. Rust-Oleum:

1) Primer: Rust-Oleum 5200 Series DTM Acrylic Primer 2) First & Second Coats: Rust-Oleum 5200 Series DTM Acrylic S/G

C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Metal:



1) Primer: Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer P04. 2) First and Second Coats: SuperSpec Acrylic Latex Semigloss #170.


1) Primer: Pitt-Tech Plus WB Industrial DTM Metal Primer 90-912 Series. 2) First and Second Coats: Pitt Tech Plus Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel

90-120 Series.


1) Primer: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish, B66W1. 2) First and Second Coats: Pro Industrial DTM Acrylic Coating Semi-Gloss B66-

1151 Series.

d. Rust-Oleum:

1) Primer: Rust-Oleum 5200 Series DTM Acrylic Primer 2) First & Second Coats: Rust-Oleum 5200 Series DTM Acrylic S/G



INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 2. Label each coat of each Sample. 3. Label each Sample for location and application area. 4. Draw-Down Samples: Provide 3 “draw-down” samples of each specified sheen, color and

finish.

E. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. VOC content.


A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.



A. Storage: Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.



A. Ambient Conditions:

1. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

2. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings; PPG Paints. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company. 4. Rust-Oleum.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in “Interior Paint Schedule” article in Part 3 below for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL



2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.


1. Recycled and Bio-Based Content: Give preference to products containing recycled material and bio-based content.

C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.



C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations and MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual as applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Stripping: Perform finish stripping where indicated in accordance with requirements of paint system manufacturer for substrates indicated.

E. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

H. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

I. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

J. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood

filler. Sand smooth when dried.

K. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

L. PVC Piping: Remove dust, dirt, clear coat and other material that may impair bond of paint.



3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or

other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or

other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect. i. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and

outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

3. Do not paint valves, fire wiring, or operating parts of mechanical, electrical, plumbing or fire protection systems.




A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.



B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete and Masonry Other Than Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Low-Luster, Satin or Eggshell Sheen:


1) Primer (Unpainted Surfaces): Moore Acrylic Masonry Sealer #066. 2) First and Second Coats: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Zero VOC Eggshell

Enamel N538.


1) Primer (Unpainted Surfaces): Speedhide Zero Int. Latex Quick Drying Primer/Sealer, 6-4900XI.

2) First and Second Coats: Speedhide Zero Interior Eggshell Latex 6-4310 Series.


1) Primer (Unpainted Surfaces): ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W2600.

2) First and Second Coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2650 Series.

d. Rust-Oleum:

1) Primer: Zinsser Bulls Eye Zero Acrylic Primer 2) First & Second Coats: Sierra Performance Beyond No VOC Satin

B. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Satin or Eggshell Sheen:


1) Block Filler (Unfinished Surfaces): SuperSpec Latex Block Filler 206.



2) First and Second Coats: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Zero VOC Eggshell N538.


1) Block Filler (Unfinished Surfaces): 6-7 Speedhide Latex Block Filler. 2) First and Second Coats: Speedhide Zero Int. Eggshell Latex, 6-4310XI

Series.


1) Block Filler (Unfinished Surfaces): PrepRite Latex Block Filler B25W25. 2) First and Second Coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eggshell, B20-

2650 Series.

d. Rust-Oleum:

1) Primer: Zinsser High Build Block Filler 2) First & Second Coats: Sierra Performance Beyond No VOC Satin

C. Gypsum Board:

1. Flat Sheen (Ceilings Only):


1) Primer (Unpainted Surfaces): Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Zero VOC Primer Sealer N534.

2) First and Second Coats: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Zero VOC Flat N536.


1) Primer (Unpainted Surfaces): Speedhide Zero Int. Latex Quick Drying Primer/Sealer, 6-4900XI.

2) First and Second Coats: Speedhide Zero Interior Semi-Gloss Latex l, 6-4110XISeries.


1) Primer (Unpainted Surfaces): ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600.

2) First and Second Coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-2650 Series.

d. Rust-Oleum:

1) Primer: Zinsser Bulls Eye Zero Acrylic Primer 2) First & Second Coats: Zinsser Perma White Interior Acrylic Flat Matte

2. Low-Luster, Satin or Eggshell Sheen:


1) Primer (Unfinished Surfaces): Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Primer Sealer N534.

2) First and Second Coats: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Zero VOC Eggshell Enamel N538.


1) Primer (Unfinished Surfaces): Speedhide ZeroLatex Quick Drying Primer/Sealer, 6-4900XI.

2) First and Second Coats: Speedhide Zero Interior Eggshell Latex 6-4310 Series.




1) Primer (Unfinished Surfaces): ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600.

2) First and Second Coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2650 Series.

d. Rust-Oleum:

1) Primer: Zinsser Bulls Eye Zero Acrylic Primer 2) First & Second Coats: Sierra Performance Beyond No VOC Satin

D. Mechanical and Electrical Items: Use 3-coat system best suited to substrate, satin finish. Use heat resistant materials where required.

E. Ferrous Metal:



1) Primer (Unfinished Surfaces): Acrylic Metal Primer P04. 2) First and Second Coats: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss N539.


1) Primer (Unfinished Surfaces): Pitt Tech Plus WB Int./.Ext. Industrial Primer DTM 90-912 Series.

2) First and Second Coats: Speedhide Zero Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel, 6-4510XI Series.


1) Primer (Unfinished Surfaces): B66W1 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish. 2) First and Second Coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex S/G, B31-2600

Series.

d. Rust-Oleum:

1) Primer: Zinsser Bulls Eye Zero Acrylic Primer 2) First & Second Coats: Sierra Performance Beyond No VOC Gloss

F. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Metal:



1) Primer (Unfinished Surfaces): Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer P04. 2) First and Second Coats: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss

N539.


1) Primer (Unfinished Surfaces): Pitt Tech Plus WB Int./Ext. Industrial Primer DTM 90-912 Series.

2) First and Second Coats: Speedhide Zero Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel, 6-4510XI Series.


1) Primer (Unfinished Surfaces):B66W1 DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish. 2) First and Second Coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-2600

Series.

d. Rust-Oleum:

1) Primer: Zinsser Bulls Eye Zero Acrylic Primer



2) First & Second Coats: Sierra Performance Beyond No VOC Gloss

G. Overhead Exposed Construction (Deck, Joists, Steel): One coat flat dry fallout coating system to cover formulated for compatibility with all substrates by any paint manufacturer specified in this Section. Use 100 percent acrylic, flash-rust-resistance dryfall.

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.: SK-5000 Coronado Spray Latex Flat Dry Fall 153 N110. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings; PPG Paints: Speedhide Super Tech WB Interior 100% Acrylic

Dry-Fog Latex 6-724XI. PPG 6-725XI is not a 100% Acrylic Product according to the latest data sheet

3. Sherwin-Williams Company:B42W1 Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall Flat. 4. Rust-Oleum: Zinsser Dry Fall Coating Acrylic Flat

H. Cotton or Canvas Insulation-Covering Substrates, Including Pipe and Duct Coverings:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.:

a. Primer: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Zero VOC Latex Primer N534. b. First and Second Coats: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Zero VOC Latex Eggshell, N538.

2. PPG Architectural Coatings; PPG Paints:

a. Primer: Speedhide Zero Int. Latex Quick Drying Primer/Sealer, 6-4900X. b. First and Second Coats: Speedhide Zero Interior Eggshell Latex Enamel, 6-4310XI

Series.

3. Sherwin-Williams Company:

a. Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28 W2600. b. First and Second Coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2650 Series.

4. Rust-Oleum:

a. Primer: Zinsser Bulls Eye Zero Acrylic Primer b. First & Second Coats: Sierra Performance Beyond No VOC Satin

I. Exposed PVC Piping:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.:

a. Bond Coat: STIX Waterborn Bonding Primer SXA-110; Insl-X. b. First and Second Coats: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Zero VOC Latex Eggshell, N538.

2. PPG Architectural Coatings; PPG Paints:

a. Bond Coat: SEAL GRIP 17-921 Interior/Exterior 100% Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer.

b. First and Second Coats: Speedhide Zero Interior Eggshell Latex Enamel, 6-4310XI Series.

3. Sherwin-Williams Company:

a. Bond Coat:B51W450 MULTI-PURPOSE Interior/Exterior Latex Primer/Sealer. b. First and Second Coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B202600 Series.

4. Rust-Oleum:

a. Primer: Zinsser Bulls Eye Zero Acrylic Primer b. First & Second Coats: Sierra Performance Beyond No VOC Satin



HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 1

SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates:

1. Exterior Substrates: a. Steel. b. Galvanized metal.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.



1. Indicate VOC content.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For interior coatings, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 2. Label each coat of each Sample. 3. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.



A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.





A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Corotech manufactured by Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings, PPG Paints. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company. 4. Tnemec Company Inc. 5. Rust-Oleum Corporation

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated include products listed in Exterior High-Performance Coating Schedule or Interior High-Performance Coating Schedule for coating category indicated.

2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL



2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in coating system.


1. Recycled and Bio-Based Content: Give preference to products containing recycled material and bio-based content.

C. Colors: As indicated in color schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.



1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

C. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

1. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 2. SSPC-SP 11. 3. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. 4. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2. 5. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1.

D. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings. Test to confirm the surface in not chromate passivated. Comply with requirements of ASTM D 6386-99 Blast Cleaning.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

C. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

D. Do not allow excessive time to elapse following application of epoxy type coatings, as determined by the manufacturer; document manufacturer's recommendation for the Architect's information.

E. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

F. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.



G. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.



B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates: Exposed substrates.

1. Pigmented Polyurethane over Zinc-Rich Primer System:

a. PPG Architectural Coatings, PPG Paints:

1) Prime Coat: AQUAPON 97-670 series Organic Zinc Rich Primer. 2) Intermediate Coat: Pittguard 97-946 series All-Weather DTR Epoxy Mastic. 3) Topcoat: PPG 90-812 Series Pitthane Ultra Acrylic Polyurethane.

b. Sherwin-Williams Company:

1) Prime Coat: S-W Zinc Clad XI WB Inorganic Zinc-Rich Coating. 2) Intermediate Coat: S-W Acrolon Waterbased Acrolon 100 WB Urethane

Gloss Enamel. 3) Topcoat: S-W Acrolon Waterbased Acrolon 100 WB Urethane Gloss Enamel.

c. Tnemec Company, Inc.:

1) Prime (Shop) Coat: Series 94H2O Hydro Zinc. Refer to applicable Division 05 Section.

2) Intermediate Coat: Series 27 W.B. Typoxy. 3) Topcoat - Semi-Gloss: 1081 Endura-Shield. 4) Topcoat - Semi-Gloss: Advanced Technology Modified Polycarbide Series

750 UVX. 5) Topcoat - Semi-Gloss: Gold Standard Fluoropolymer Series 1071.



6) Topcoat - Gloss: 1080 Endura-Shield. 7) Topcoat - Gloss: Advanced Technology Modified Polycarbide Series 740. 8) Topcoat - Gloss: Gold Standard Fluoropolymer Series V1070.

d. Rust-Oleum Corporation

1) Prime Coat(Shop): Rust-Oleum Rust-O-Zinc Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer 2) Prime Coat(Field): Rust-O-Zinc Organic Zinc Rich Primer 3) Rust-Oleum V9100 Series Epoxy Mastic 4) Rust-Oleum Series 3300 Series Aliphatic Urethane

e.

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Pigmented Polyurethane over Epoxy Primer System:

a. PPG Architectural Coatings, PPG Paints:

1) Prime Coat: Pittguard 97-946 series All-Weather DTR Epoxy Mastic. 2) Intermediate Coat: Pittguard 97-946 series All-Weather DTR Epoxy Mastic. 3) Topcoat: Amercoat PSX 1 Series Single Pack Acrylic Polysiloxane.

b. Sherwin-Williams Company:

1) Prime Coat: Waterbased Tile-Clad Epoxy Primer or, for high abrasion areas: DTM Wash Primer B71Y00001.

2) Intermediate Coat: S-W Acrolon Waterbased Acrolon 100 WB Urethane Gloss Enamel.

3) Topcoat: S-W Acrolon Waterbased Acrolon 100 WB Urethane Gloss Enamel.

c. Tnemec Company, Inc.:

1) Prime Coat: Series 27 W.B. Typoxy. 2) Intermediate Coat: Series 27 W.B. Typoxy. 3) Topcoat - Semi-Gloss: 1081 Endura-Shield. 4) Topcoat - Gloss: 1080 Endura-Shield.

a. Rust-Oleum:

1) Prime Coat: Rust-Oleum V9100 Series Epoxy Mastic 2) Intermediate Coat: Rust-Oleum V9100 Series Epoxy Mastic 3) Rust-Oleum Series 3300 Series Aliphatic Urethane



THERMAL-BREAK COATING FOR STEEL 099714 - 1

SECTION 099714 - THERMAL-BREAK COATING FOR STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This specification covers in accordance with all applicable requirements of contract documents.

B. Section Includes

1. Labor, materials, equipment, and application necessary for, and incidental to, complete and proper application of liquid-applied thermal break acrylic to steel structures and supports, including, but not limited to:

a. Corrosion protection primer material. b. Liquid Applied Thermal Break Acrylic. c. Topcoat for Liquid Applied Thermal Break Acrylic


A. Product Data: Product data including manufacturer’s technical data indicating product performance characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.

1. Include published design listings for insulation value ratings and product thickness, including evidence that thermal-break coating testing was sponsored by manufacturer and that material tested was produced at manufacturer’s facility under supervision of technical personnel.

2. Include manufacturer’s documentation that thermal-break coating complies with specified requirements


A. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Submit manufacturer written application instructions.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Submit applicator’s current certification as manufacturer-trained applicator.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing thermal-break coating for steel with minimum of 2 years documented experience in manufacturing insulative technology.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in applying thermal-break coating with documented experience and certified and trained by thermal-break coating manufacturer.

C. Mock-up: Not more than thirty days prior to thermal-break coating application in any area, provide mock-up samples of thermal-break coating as follows:

1. Provide minimum two square feet on representative substrate, where directed by Architect, for each different desired R-value and finish required.

2. Provide mock-up areas complying with thickness, density application, finish texture, and color.

3. Inspect mock-up areas within one hour of application for variance due to shrinkage, temperature, and humidity.

4. Where shrinkage and cracking are evident, adjust mixture and method of application as necessary to comply with installation, R-value, finish, and color requirements.

5. Continue to provide mock-up areas until acceptable areas are produced. 6. Acceptable areas constitute standard of acceptance for method of application, thickness,

finish texture, and color requirements, for thermal-break coating application.



1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, sealed, undamaged container with identification label intact. Provide appropriate labels and seals on packaged materials.

B. Storage: Store materials in strict accordance with manufacturer’s documented instructions.

C. Documentation: Record on quality control documents all batch numbers, product identification and quantities and attach copy of transport document and manufacturer’s conformance certificate to material delivered on Site.

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Ambient Conditions: Comply with manufacturer’s requirements for substrate and air temperature. Protect work area from windblown dust and rain and protect adjacent areas from over spray of material. Provide ventilation in areas to receive thermal-break coating during application and minimum 24 hours after application.

1. Temperature and Humidity Requirements: Maintain air temperature and relative humidity in areas where thermal-break coating will be applied for time period before, during, and after application as recommended by thermal-break coating manufacturer.

a. Do not apply thermal-break coating when temperature of substrate and/or surrounding ambient air temperature is below 45 deg. F. Provide and maintain temporary protection and vented heat at this minimum temperature for 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after thermal-break coating application.

b. Ensure steel substrate temperature is minimum of 5 deg. F above dew point of surrounding air for 24 hours prior and during thermal-break coating application.

c. If necessary, coordinate providing enclosures and heat to maintain proper temperatures and humidity levels in application areas.

d. Do not exceed 85 percent relative humidity of application area for 24 hours prior, during, and 24 hours after thermal-break coating application. Do not exceed 75 percent relative humidity throughout thermal-break coating application and drying of the decorative top coat finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID APPLIED THERMAL BREAK ACRYLIC COATING

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated below by Tnemec Company, Inc. or comparable product approved by the Architect.

1. Sole Source: Provide complete system from sole source consisting of primer, acrylic thermal break material, and topcoat.

B. Performance Criteria

1. Complete System:

a. ASTM E 84: Class A b. ASTM D 5894: 5,000 hrs Prohesion (Topcoated) c. ASTM B 117: 5,000 hrs. Salt Fog (Topcoated) d. ASTM D 870: 6 months Immersion in tap water (Topcoated) e. ASTM D 4585: 2,000 hrs. Humidity (Topcoated) f. ASTM D870 Method B: 2,000 hrs. 140F DI Water Immersion (Topcoated) g. ASTM D 4060 (CS-17 Wheel, 1,000g load): No more than 50.2 mg loss after

1,000 cycles. h. ASTM C518 Thermal Conductivity: Not greater than 0.2468 BTU-in/ft2-hr-deg.F.



i. ASTM D1653 Method B Wet Cup: No more than 23.91 g/sq.m per 24 hour water vapor transmission and no more than 1.71 perms (1.13 metric perms water vapor permeance).

2. System Thickness / R-Value:

a. 1/32 inch thick: R-0.10. b. 1/16-inch thick: R-0.25. c. 1/8-inch thick: R-0.5. d. 1/4-inch thick: R-1. e. 3/8-inch thick: R-1.5 f. 1/2-inch thick: R-2. g. 5/8-inch thick: R-2.5. h. 3/4-inch thick: R-3. i. 7/8-inch thick: R-3.5. j. 1-inch thick: R-4.0

C. Primer - Shop Applied or Field Applied: Aromatic polyurethane, mio-zinc filled primer.

1. Basis-of-Design Product Tnemec Series 394 Perimiprime. 2. Properties:

a. Solids by Volume: 61 percent mixed. b. Recommended Film Thickness: 2.5 to 3.5 mils dry film thickness (DFT). c. VOC Content: 2.05 lbs. per gallon d. Curing Time at 75 degrees F: 15 minutes to touch, 16 hours to recoat e. Net Weight per Gallon: 21.36 lbs. f. Pot Life at 77 degrees F and 50 percent R.H.: 24 hours g. UL classified in accordance with UL 263 (ASTM E119), meeting material adhesion

test ASTM E736 under various fire resistive products. h. Meets AISC requirements in accordance with RCSC Appendix A for Class B surface

with mean slip coefficient no less than 0.50 and tension creep not in excess of 0.005 inches.

D. Thermal Break Material - Shop Applied or Field Applied: Aerolon acrylic coating.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Tnemec Series 971 Aerolon Acrylic. 2. Properties:

a. Solids by Volume: 76 percent. b. Recommended Film Thickness: 40 to 300 mils dry film thickness (DFT) applied in

multiple applications to specified R-value. c. VOC Content: 0.01 lbs. per Gallon. d. VOC Thinned: 0.01 lbs. per gallon. e. Curing Time at 75 deg. F: 4 hours to touch , 16 hours to recoat f. Thermal Conductivity, ASTM C 518: No more than 35.6 mW/ mK g. Net Weight per Gallon: 4.66 lbs. per gallon. h. Storage Temperature: 40 deg. F.; maximum 110 deg. F.. i. Number of Components: Single component j. Pot Life: 2 hours k. Spray Life: 2 hours



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions

1. Verify all surfaces receive thermal-break coating are clean, dry and free of oil, grease, loose mill scale, dirt, dust or other foreign substances which would impair bond of coating to substrate.

2. Verify substrate and workspace temperature and humidity conditions are in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Start of application of thermal-break coating indicates surfaces are acceptable to receive primer and thermal-break material.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide masking, drop cloths or other suitable coverings to prevent overspray onto surfaces not intended to be coated with thermal-break coating.

B. In accordance with coating manufacturer’s recommendations and ins tructions, clean steel substrate free from dust, dirt, grease, paint or other foreign substances that would impair with bond of thermal-break coating.

C. Grind smooth weld spatter and defects prior to commencement of surface preparation.

D. Do not apply primer to prepared substrate until area has been adequately vented to remove all airborne dust. Prior to application of any coating material, remove blast products, dust and debris.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply thermal-break coating in accordance with manufacturer’s application instructions at indicated dry film thickness (DFT).

B. Do not spray steel deck unless otherwise indicated. All other thermal break locations as indicated on the contract documents shall be coated to achieve an R value of .25 (90-100 mils DFT of Series 971 Aerolon). At each location, apply thermal-break coating system to cover steel beams 18-24 inches inside wall system, through width of wall system, and 18-24 inches outboard of wall system. Seal all penetrations as recommended by coating manufacturer.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage services of qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.5 CLEAN UP AND REPAIR

A. Upon completion of installation, clear all excess material, overspray and debris and remove from Site.

B. Remove overspray materials from surfaces not indicated to be coated.



PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.19 - 1

SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.

B. LEED Submittals:


C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show locations of floor drains. 5. Show overhead support or bracing locations.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.

2. Each type of hardware and accessory.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and source.

1. Door Hinges: One hinge(s) with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners. 3. Door Bumper: One bumper(s) with associated fasteners. 4. Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners. 5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 3. Global Steel Products Corp. 4. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced and Floor anchored.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung.

D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or stainless-steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion.

2. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as indicated by manufacturer's designations.

E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

F. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel for use when wainscot prevents the use of a full-height (continuous) bracket.

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel for use on all urinal screens and toilet partitions where wainscot does not prevent use.

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch- thick stainless-steel paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through-bolts.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface-mounted cast-stainless-steel latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.








3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless-steel hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Mount with through-bolts.

4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty rubber-tipped cast-stainless-steel bumper at out-swinging doors. Mount with through-bolts.

5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast-stainless-steel pull at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

B. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:



a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.

a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

3. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position.

D. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.



TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Custodial accessories.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 088300 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.




2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.

3. Include electrical characteristics.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.


A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed below or comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Specialties, Inc.; ASI Group. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. 4. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick.

2.2 PRODUCTS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. TA-10, TA-11, TA-12: Grab bar set for use at water closet; one – 36 inch long; one – 42 inch long; one – 18 inch long vertical; Bobrick B-5806 series.

C. TA-09: Toilet paper dispenser; OFCI.

D. TA-08: Napkin disposal; Bobrick B-254.

E. TA-13: Door hook; Bobrick B-6717.

F. TA-05: Electric hand dryer; World Dryer VMax; OFCI.

G. TA-03: Soap dispenser; OFCI.

H. TA-15: Mop rack and shelf; Bobrick B-239-34.

I. Paper towel dispenser; Bobrick B-2621. Located as shown on drawings (rooms other than toilets)

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness.

C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

D. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

E. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.



FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers (5 lb.) provided by Owner.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semi-recessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples 6 by 6 inches square.


A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

1.5 SEQUENCING

A. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.


a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group; Insert product designation Basis-of-Design Product model #1016, 1-1/2 inch square trim.

b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc; . c. Larsens Manufacturing Company; . d. Nystrom, Inc.; .

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated and 1-hour fire rated.

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.043-inch- thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.



C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D. Semi-recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open

180 degrees.

J. Accessories:

1. Identification:

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

K. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Factory primed for field painting.

2. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.



C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed cabinets will be installed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below:

1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets.

2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.



E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING 105626 - 1

SECTION 105626 - MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Mechanically assisted , carriage mounted high-density mobile storage units, support rails, fabrication, and installation including recessing and leveling of support rail.

2. Steel four-post shelving.

B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:

1. Inserts in cast-in-place concrete. 2. Structural floor system capable of supporting live and dead loads required by prevailing

building codes, including rolling loads of storage units to be installed. Provide a minimum allowable sub floor deflection of L/480 or L/360 with Automatic Brake under specified mobile storage loads.

3. Concrete floor including base pour and back pour on mobile storage footprint of not less than 2 inches in depth.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Recessed Tracks: Coordinate size and location of recesses and inserts in concrete with installation of recessed tracks.



1. Inspect and discuss condition and levelness of flooring and other preparatory work performed under other contracts.

2. In addition to the Owner and the installer, arrange for attendance of the following:

a. Other installers affected by the work of this section. b. Manufacturer's representative.



1. Include mobile operation, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for mobile storage shelving systems and accessories.

2. Include installed weight load criteria, furnished specialties, and accessories.



C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Show shelving layout. 3. Show location and extent of rail system including depth required if recessed. 4. Show clear-aisle widths from face of carriages.



5. Detail fabrication and installation of mobile shelving systems including methods of anchoring shelves to carriages and rails to building structure as required for seismic restraint.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, one of each, in manufacturer's standard size:

1. Flat shelving. 2. Each type of specialized shelving. 3. Front panels.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For mobile storage shelving, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Seismic Design Calculations: For seismic design of mobile storage shelving systems including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.


A. Maintenance Data: For mobile shelving systems and operating manuals to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating mobile storage shelving that meets or exceeds performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports, and calculations.

B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of support rail anchors, depressed slab, embedded conduit, and other construction contiguous with mobile storage shelving by field measurements before fabrication.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of mobile shelving systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal wear.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For mobile storage shelving, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



B. Seismic Performance: Mobile shelving systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. System shall be designed to meet Seismic Category "D". Documentation shall be provided showing seismic calculations, stamped by a certified Missouri licensed structural engineer stating the systems provided in this proposal meets proper Seismic Anchorage design and Shelving design for Seismic Category "D".

C. Structural Performance: Provide mobile shelving systems capable of supporting the following:

1. Load per Linear Foot of Carriage: 1000 lb/ft..

D. Operating Force: For manually operated systems, maximum 1 lbf required to move 1000 lb .

2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard mobile storage shelving systems and components. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard components as required for a complete system.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Inserts: Furnish required concrete inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing track system, and furnish other components of work where installation of devices is specified in another Section.

D. Anti-Tip Brackets: Mount on carriage for engagement with track system to secure units against tipping.

E. Carriage End Panels: Full depth and height of shelving units. Provide at the operating end of each range.

1. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet, 0.048 inch thick.

2.3 MECHANICALLY ASSISTED SYSTEMS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Spacesaver Corporation; Mechanically Operated Movable Shelving Systems or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Montel Inc. 2. Tab US.

B. Drive Systems: Geared transmission and chain systems with tensioning device to provide mechanical assistance and uniform movement along entire length of each carriage. Permanently shielded and lubricated.

C. Drive Shaft: Continuous tubular or solid steel shaft, capable of transmitting torque from drive system without distortion.

D. Locking Pins: Located on range end panels to allow locking of individual range carriage when depressed.






2.4 MATERIALS

A. Rail: Room 1050 & 1052 ALT 5 Seed Storage

1. Material should be ASTM/AISI Type 1035 or 1045 steel, manufacturer's selection. Minimum contact surface to be 5/8 inch wide top surface. Rail to be a one piece, structural design with concrete form channel for recess mounting and fully welded seismic anchor plate construction. Configuration shall permit provision for leveling rails to compensate for variations in the floor surface level. All rail joints to be tongue and groove and/or overlapped and bolted. All rail assembles shall be fully grouted with a non-shrink hydraulic cement type grout with an 8,000-psi strength after curing. Shimmed rails and butt joint rails are unacceptable.

2. Anti-Tip Rail Form Covers: Manufacturer shall provide for protection to prevent damage to anti tip rails during concrete back pour including form covers.

3. Rail to be installed into a depression 2 inch deep with a second back pour of concrete flush to top of rail form. Concrete work is by others.The high-density system supplier is to work closely with the general contractor on coordination of second pour.

B. Rail: Room 1056 ALT 6 Supply Storage

1. Provide manufacturer's standard seismic design units with the following properties. Material should be ASTM/AISI Type manufacturer's selection 5/8 inch x 5/8 inch 1045 steel bar interlocked and welded into a powder coat finished base channel minimum 11 gauge 3-7/16 inch wide, 3/4 inch return anti-tip flanges fully welded seismic anchor plate construction. All rail assembles shall be fully grouted with a non-shrink hydraulic cement type grout with an 8,000-psi strength after curing. All rail splice joints shall have interlocking braces and splice plates that provide permanent horizontal and vertical rail alignment Shimmed rails are unacceptable.

2. Anti-Tip Rail Form Covers: Manufacturer shall provide for protection to prevent damage to anti tip rails during the concrete back pour.

3. Rail to be installed into a depression 2 inch deep with a second back pour of concrete flush to top of rail form. Concrete work is by others. The high-density system supplier is to work closely with the general contractor on coordination of second pour.

C. Carriages

1. Carriages shall be minimum 1,000 lbs. per linear carriage foot capacity, fixture unit welded, unframed assemblies constructed of 12-gauge minimum steel with main supporting structural face section 5-3/4 inches high with two reinforcing flanges running the full length of the carriage. Main supporting structural face sections shall provide a 3/4 inch shelf mounting recess for positive shelving alignment and attachment. Wheel support section shall be 12-gauge minimum steel and shall be welded between the main support face sections, one per rail assembly. Provide each carriage with two wheels per rail. Carriage face sections shall provide a smooth clean appearance without any exposed assembly holes or protruding hardware. Bolted, riveted or galvanized bracing or structural components unacceptable. Top mount carriages are unacceptable.

2. Stationary platforms shall be of the same construction and height as the moveable carriages, and shall be anchored to the rails/floor. Stationary ranges of shelving in the high-density shelving modules must be on stationary platforms. Floor mounted ranges in the system modules is not acceptable.

D. Carriage and Platform Splice: All carriage splices shall be tongue and groove, offset angle, tension bolted type, designed to maintain proper unit alignment and weight load distribution.



E. Face Panels:

1. All exposed ends shall have steel face panels covering the full width and height of the carriage and storage housing. Face panels shall be constructed of 18-gauge steel. A minimum of three 18-gauge structural hat channel supports shall be welded into the back of the panel at the top, base and center to provide unit rigidity. Face panels shall be free of any exposed assembly holes or protruding hardware, and shall be assembled without any exposed sharp edges. Face panels shall be powder coat painted from manufacturer's standard colors. Two 3 inch x 5 inch cardholders shall be provided per aisle entry location and attached to the end panels with centers located 60 inches above the finished floor.

2. Materials: Face panels shall be constructed of 18-gauge steel. A minimum of three 18-gauge structural hat channel supports shall be welded into the back of the panel at the top, base and center.

3. Finishes: Standard powder coat paint finishes. 4. End panels must cover the full height and width of shelving.

F. Operation

1. Provide an ergonomic spoke drive handle to provide an efficient method of moving mobile system carriages that feature a user activated safety lock.

2. Provide Adjustable chain tensioner allowing tension adjustment without the removal of the face panel.

G. Drive / Guidance System: Room 1050 & 1052 Seed Storage

1. Drive: Drive wheels shall be 5 inch outside diameter 1045 solid steel equipped with two (2) permanently shielded bearing assemblies. Spacers to be provided on both sides of wheel bearings to eliminate friction between wheels and carriage. Minimum load capacity per wheel should be 3,200 pounds. Synchronized drives, a minimum of one wheel assembly driving both sides of the carriage at the center location required. Drive shaft shall exhibit no play or looseness over the entire length of that assembly. Shafts shall be solid steel rod or tube, connections shall be secured couplings. Bearing surfaces shall provide rotating load bearing members with ball or roller bearings. Provide shafts with pillow block or flanged self-aligning type bearings.

2. Guidance Provide four roller type guide bearings per wheel channel assembly, two at the end of each wheel channel. Guide bearings shall be precision machined, cam follower type of hardened steel, permanently lubricated and adjustable to ensure proper alignment of the carriages. Maximum profile of recess adjacent to rail for guide bearings and anti-tip system: 1-1/8 inch wide by 3/4 inch deep. Provide two opposing in-rail anti-tip assemblies per wheel channel that inter-member with the rail system's anti-tip grooves and are fully adjustable to ensure proper alignment.

H. Drive / Guidance System: Room 1056 ALT 6 Supply Storage

1. Drive: Line Shaft drive shall consist of a wheel section positioned at each rail location. Wheel section shall consist of a load wheel and a drive wheel. Each wheel shall be provided with two permanently shielded bearing assemblies. Wheels shall be ASTM A 536 specification 65/45/12 machined ductile iron. All wheels shall be 5 inch diameter. All wheels on one side of the carriage shall be driven by a continuous steel drive shaft 1-5/16 inch O.D. by 1 inch I.D. connected to the 1 inch diameter wheel drive axles with bolted clamp connections.

2. Guidance: Provide two dual flanged wheels on all wheel channel assemblies with anti-tip capabilities. Provide two carriage-mounted, steel, anti-tip hooks at the leading edges of each wheel channel assembly which inter-member with the anti-tip rail assembly.



I. Mechanical Safety Sweep: Every potential aisle shall be protected with a 3 inch high extruded aluminum safety sweep, hinged from the carriage using spring steel leaf springs, with the base edge maximum 3/4 inch from the floor. The carriage(s) shall stop when depressed at any location along the leading edge of the sweep surface. Activated safety sweep shall engage an impact-absorbing friction disk brake to protect occupants, stored media and the carriage system itself via a sheathed cable system comprised of aircraft-grade 3/64 inch stainless steel core cables housed inside lined conduit. Safety sweep shall have bright, red and white safety identification tape applied full length marking its location. Safety sweep shall run the full length of both sides of each moveable carriage for full aisle coverage. Mechanical safety sweep shall automatically reset to enable mobile system users to freely and safely back carriages away from aisle obstructions simply by reversing the direction of the rotating handle. Safety sweep shall be operational when the carriages are not moving. Should a sweep be activated in an open aisle, the carriage with the activated sweep will not close on that aisle. Safety sweep shall automatically reset if activated and then released when the carriages are not moving. Safety sweep shall require no electrical power or batteries to operate.

2.5 FOUR POST SHELVING FOR MOBILE AND STATIONARY RANGES

A. Design: Wedge-lock type consisting of uprights, shelves, and shelf supports, designed to be assembled without fasteners or clips. Shelves shall not have any holes on exposed surfaces. Front and back flanges shall be flush with outside faces of posts. Design shall permit individual shelf adjustment and/or removal anywhere along the entire height of uprights.

1. Materials and Workmanship: Fabricate units from Class 1, cold-rolled steel sheet with all bends sharp and true and no exposed "knife"edges.

2. All units shall be free of burrs, sharp edges and projecting hardware with smooth, non-abrasive surfaces and edges.

3. After fabrication, shelving shall exhibit no dents, "oil canning", buckling or other surface irregularities.

B. Uprights: Formed from steel sheet to a hollow "tee" shape for intermediate supports and formed angles for end supports. Uprights shall have keyhole slots on inner wall only. Provide intermediate "tee" uprights between adjacent units. All units are "back to back" Shelves: Form from sheet steel with flanges on all sides and return hem on front and back flanges. Ends shall be formed to clear inside of upright offset panels. Shelves shall be independently adjustable. Provide all shelves with slots for optional accessories.

C. Canopy Tops: Same construction as shelf units.

D. Shelf Supports: Form from heavy gauge steel sheet with four solid steel shoulder rivets, two per ear, that interlock with inner wall of uprights.

1. Standard Width: 42 inches, with 30, or 48 inch sections used to meet project requirements.

2. Shelf Edge Vertical Profile: 3/4-inch maximum. 3. Vertical Adjustment Increment: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Width of Intermediate Uprights: 2 inches. 5. Clearance Between Uprights: Nominal shelf section width minus 2 inches. 6. Levelness of Completed Shelf Units: Maximum 1/8 inch between bottom shelf and

canopy top, measured along the edge of any upright in any direction. 7. Number of Vertical Shelf Spaces: As indicated on the drawings. 8. Vertical Shelf-To-Shelf Spacing: As indicated on the drawings. 9. Static sections to include front base cover at floor to prevent debris

E. Load Carrying Capabilities: Provide shelves capable of supporting 300 lbs. per shelf. Shelves shall exhibit no permanent deflection under fully loaded conditions.

F. Accessories: Provide a brochure of available accessories.



2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils .

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of framing and reinforcements, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting performance of mobile shelving systems.


C. Inspect substrates and conditions in which high density storage shelving, tracks and blockouts will be installed and verify that installation may commence. Verify locations of positioning of exits and aisles and overall dimensions of space. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved fully.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Lay out rail in pit left after first pour of concrete has set to appropriate psi. Level and fully grout rail/seismic plates. Anchor plates with engineer designated anchors at centers advised in the seismic structural documentation.

B. Assist concrete contractor with any issues during back pour of rails.

C. Permanently attach shelving units to carriages. Stabilize shelving units to comply with mobile storage unit manufacturer's written requirements. Reinforce shelving units to withstand the stress of movement required in the seismic structural documentation

D. Install mobile storage systems, shelving, track, and accessories after finishing operations, including painting have been completed. Install system to comply with final layout drawings, in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Position units level, plumb; at proper location relative to adjoining units and related work. Floor covering furnished and installed œby others.

E. Level and plumb tracks to a tolerance of 0.09 inch in 120 inches with no more than 0.06-inch variation between adjacent rails. Use permanent shims or non-shrink grout as indicated by manufacturer.

F. Recessed Track Systems: Solidly fill gaps between slab and rail according to manufacturer's written instructions to secure tracks and prevent movement.

G. Carriage Installation: Mount mobile carriages on track system with anti-tip brackets engaged by rails and adjust for smooth operation. Provide non-moving carriages securely fixed to rails where indicated.

3.3 SHELVING INSTALLATION

A. Attach shelving units to carriages according to manufacturer's written instructions and as required to prevent vibration during movement.

1. Level and plumb shelving units to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches .

B. Install shelves in shelving units at locations indicated on Drawings and according to manufacturer's written instructions.



C. Shelving Enclosure Panels: Install with concealed fasteners.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.

B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

C. Protect installed products from damage during remainder of the construction period.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mobile storage shelving.



BUILDING MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT 110140 - 1

SECTION 110140 - BUILDING MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section is intended to cover the performance requirements of the Building Maintenance Equipment (BME). All work and material necessary to accomplish this complete installation shall be included, including shipping, hoisting, installation, and customs, except that specifically excluded.

B. Any and all of the BME which must be installed in related work executed by others shall be identified and listed.

C. Notwithstanding any reference in this performance specification to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalogue number, such references shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition and the BME Contractor, in such cases, may at their option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which, in the judgment of the Owner and Architect, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK PROVIDED BY OTHERS

A. Safety belt or body harness, with a lanyard and other safety equipment such as independent hanging life lines, by the window cleaning contractor.

B. Flashing and sealing.


A. An approved equivalent contractor (manufacturer) shall be firm whose main concern and business is solely involved in the engineering design, manufacture and installation of power operated window washing units, and who has been actively engaged in this business for no less than ten (10) years.

B. BME Systems Manufacturer: Provide BME Systems designed, engineered, manufactured and installed by:

1. Pro-Bel Group (Basis-of-Design) 2. Guardian Fall Protection

1.4 CODES AND ORDINANCES, REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. All work and equipment, its performance, use, inspection testing and maintenance shall comply with the most stringent requirements of all applicable codes and jurisdictions, included, but not limited to the most recent amendment of the following: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA): OSHA Part 1910, paragraph 1910.66

Power Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance. 2. Aluminum Association (AA): AA Specifications for Aluminum Structures. 3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). 4. AISC “Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings,"

including the “Commentary” thereto. 5. AISC “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,” including the

“Commentary” thereto. 6. American Welding Society (AWS): AWSD1.1 “Structural Welding Code, Steel,” and

AWSD1.2 “Structural Welding Code, Aluminum.” 7. Comply with the National Electric Code•, Electrical components shall be UL listed.



B. The BME Contractor shall obtain any and all necessary approvals or permits as required by governing regulatory agencies.

C. The work of this Section shall include obtaining and paying for any necessary inspection permits as required by the local inspection authority and making such tests as are called for by the regulations of such authorities.

D. Required tests shall be made in the presence of the authorized representative of such local authorities. A certificate of adequacy of the whole installation and of the testing performed shall be issued by the BME Contractor.

1.5 COORDINATION OF CONDITIONS

A. The BME Contractor shall coordinate related work and surfaces to ensure successful completion of work specified in this section.


A. Maintenance Contract: Submit with each proposal a one year equipment maintenance contract to provide services four (4) times in one year and a quotation to make it renewable for five (5) years.

B. Submit the following to the Architect for review: 1. Complete layout and configuration of suspended maintenance system, including

components and accessories. 2. Indicate design and fabrication details, hardware and installation details. 3. Include installation and rigging instructions and:

a. Required restrictive working usage and general safety notes. b. Non-restrictive working usage and general safety notes.

4. Load Requirements: All loads imposed on the building structure and building exterior wall shall be shown. These loads shall be submitted to the Architect for review.

5. Ensure shop drawings are reviewed by an engineer licensed in the State of Missouri and submit calculations and test reports to the Architect.

C. Parts Catalogue: Listing replacement parts, including identifying numbers and ordering instructions.

D. Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals:

1. Obtain and hand over three complete sets of operating and maintenance instructions, after acceptance of instructions by the Owner’s Representative and Architect, for items incorporated in the works. The English language instruction manuals shall be bound, neatly labeled and indexed.

E. Lubrication charts shall be furnished, indicating all equipment lubrications points, the frequency of lubrication required, and type of lubricant for all equipment.

F. A detailed "Rescue Plan", including step by step instructions and illustrations for rescue during emergency operations.

G. Inspection Log: An inspection log shall be furnished to the Owner’s Representative for the purpose of recording daily, weekly, periodic, and bi-annual inspections.

H. Instruction Plates: Drawings and illustration metallic plates which are to be printed or etched, in English, of a non-corrosive material, to be supplied and installed, shall be submitted to the Architect for review. The platform shall also be provided with a name plate which includes the following ANSI/OSHA data:

1. Name of Manufacturer. 2. Name or Number of Model.



3. Serial Number. 4. Maximum load which may be so suspended in pounds. 5. Year of Manufacture.

1.7 OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. The BME supplier shall instruct the Owner’s Representatives and selected User Personnel in the proper usage of the BME.

B. Representative of the BME supplier shall, at time as selected by the Owner, spend two (2) man days at the building furnishing this instruction.

1. For all wall surface areas intended to be maintained from the roof, the selected contractor shall demonstrate that placement of components (roof anchors) are located appropriately to be used with outrigger beams for the intended maintenance purposes.

C. BME training attendance certificates are to be issued by the BME supplier to each of the Owner's Representatives and selected User Personnel upon completion of training.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Provide a one (1) year warranty against defects in material, workmanship, or installation for all components, providing for repair or replacement for a minimum period of one year, including material and labor.

1.9 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

A. Wind Pressure: The installations shall be designed to withstand 25 miles per hour wind velocities while being used for normal operations and shall be fully operational at wind velocities up to 50 miles per hour. They also shall be designed to withstand 100 miles per hour wind velocity when in their secured stored positions.

B. The exposed areas subjected to wind pressure shall be the total areas of all portions of the exposed parts with no shielding effect of one element by another where the distance between elements is four times or more than the smaller projected area of the windward element.

C. All structure assemblies and components shall be designed with a safety factor of 4 to 1 against failure as a minimum and to be so certified.

D. Design system fall arrest safety anchors and equipment supports to AISC S342L (including supplement No.1 and ANSI/IWCA I-14.1, and as follows: 1. Comply with OSHA 1910, Subpart F, Appendix C. 2. Fall Arrest Safety Anchors:

a. Fall arresting force safety factor of 2 to 1 without permanent deformation: 1800 lbs minimum.

3. Fall arrest force against fracture or detachment: 5,000 lbs minimum.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Rooftop Anchors by Pro-Bel Group or comparable product approved by the Architect.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS



A. All components shall be constructed of heat treated aluminum alloy, stainless steel, or hot-dipped galvanized structural steel. Dissimilar metals, when used, shall be protected against electrolytic actions.

B. All connectors shall be stainless steel unless otherwise noted. All welds shall be made by certified welders and shall be examined by non-destructive testing.

C. Components in contact with the façade and platform casters shall be on a non-marking and scuff resistant material.

D. The exterior finish of all painted assemblies shall be of a color as directed by the Owner’s Representative. All aluminum assemblies shall be of natural color. All carbon steel components shall be hot-dipped galvanized.

E. Obtain mill test reports on all wire suspension rope and on all metals, aluminum or steel, used in the manufacture of the davit bases, davit arms, transfer davit, and stage platform.

F. The material sizes and thickness shown on the drawings are for conceptual design purposes. The manufacturer shall provide the final design and detailing of the equipment.

2.3 ANCHORS

A. Safety Anchor Eye Plate: Mild steel, Type 300W with 44 Ksi minimum yield strength, hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M.

1. Plate: Minimum 0.875 inches diameter material with 2 inches eye opening.

B. Securement bolts: mild steel, Type 300W with yield strength of 44 Ksi (300 MPa), hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A123.

C. Hollow Steel Section (HSS) Piers: Mild steel, Type 300W with 50 Ksi minimum yield strength, hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M.

1. Wall thickness to suit application.

D. Plate and other sections: Mild steel, Type 300W with 44 Ksi minimum yield strength, hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M.

1. Wall thickness to suit application.

E. Seamless Spun Aluminum Flashing (for Roof Anchors): To AA ADM-1 Type 6061-T6 alloy and to ASTM B221.

1. Deck flange flashing: In accordance with Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim".

F. Miscellaneous Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Mild steel, Type 300W with 44 Ksi minimum yield strength, hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate conditions which have been previously installed under other sections or contracts, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation of anchors.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish, hoist and install all BME and components in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and at such time as approved when construction and finish of adjoining work will permit and in sufficient time to avoid delays to the construction process. All BME shall be secured in place as shown on drawings and/or as herein specified by rigid approved methods.



3.3 FINISHES

A. Galvanized surface damage shall be wire brushed and touched up with cold galvanized.


A. Repair or replace any components and correct all deficiencies observed during testing or demonstrations, and retest as required by the Owner to assure compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND FINAL CLEANING

A. Lubricate moving parts to operate smoothly and fit accurately.

B. Complete "Initial Inspection - Certification for Use" form included in Equipment Manual and Inspection Log Book provided by manufacturer.

C. Upon completion, remove surplus and excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.



LOADING DOCK BUMPERS 111313 - 1

SECTION 111313 - LOADING DOCK BUMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes loading dock bumpers.


A. Product Data: For each type of loading dock bumper.

B. Shop Drawings: For dock bumpers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOCK BUMPERS

A. General: Surface-mounted bumpers; of type, size, and construction indicated; designed to absorb kinetic energy and minimize damage to loading dock structure.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Blue Giant Equipment Corporation or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Chalfant Sewing Fabricators, Inc. b. Rite-Hite Holding Corporation.

B. Laminated-Tread Dock Bumper: Fabricated from multiple, uniformly thick plies cut from fabric-reinforced rubber tires. Laminate plies under pressure on not less than two 3/4-inch- diameter, steel supporting rods that are welded at one end to 1/4-inch- thick, structural-steel end angle and secured with a nut and angle at the other end. Fabricate angles with predrilled anchor holes and sized to provide not less than 1 inch of tread plies extending beyond the face of closure angles.

1. Thickness: 4-1/2 inches. 2. Horizontal Style: high by length indicated on Drawings.

C. Anchorage Devices: Galvanized-steel anchor bolts, nuts, washers, bolts, sleeves, cast-in-place plates, and other anchorage devices as required to fasten bumpers securely in place and to suit installation type indicated. Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

D. Materials: ASTM 36/A 36M for steel plates, shapes, and bars. Hot-dip galvanize according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=9076&mf=04&src=wd&mf=&src=wd




LOADING DOCK BUMPERS 111313 - 2

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Dock Bumpers: Attach dock bumpers to face of loading dock in a manner that complies with requirements indicated for spacing, arrangement, and position relative to top of platform and anchorage.

1. Bolted Attachment: Attach dock bumpers to preset anchor bolts embedded in concrete or to cast-in-place inserts or threaded studs welded to embedded-steel plates or angles. If preset anchor bolts, cast-in-place inserts, or threaded studs welded to embedded-steel plates or angles are not provided, attach dock bumpers by drilling and anchoring with expansion anchors and bolts.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished dock bumpers, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.



LABORATORY FUME HOODS 115313 - 1

SECTION 115313 - LABORATORY FUME HOODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bench-top laboratory fume hoods. 2. Piping and wiring within fume hoods for service fittings, light fixtures, fan switches, and

other electrical devices included with fume hoods. 3. Fume hood base cabinets. 4. Work tops within fume hoods. 5. Water, laboratory gas, and electrical service fittings in fume hoods.



1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for lateral support of fume hoods.

B. Coordinate installation of fume hoods with laboratory casework and other laboratory equipment.



B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory fume hoods.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Indicate details for anchoring fume hoods to permanent building construction including

locations of blocking and other supports. Include calculations demonstrating that anchorages comply with seismic performance requirements.

3. Indicate locations and types of service fittings together with associated service supply connection required.

4. Indicate duct connections, electrical connections, and locations of access panels. 5. Include roughing-in information for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical connections. 6. Show adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components, laboratory casework,

and other laboratory equipment. Indicate clearances from the above items. 7. Include layout of fume hoods in relation to lighting fixtures and air-conditioning registers

and grilles. 8. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For fume hoods indicated to comply with seismic performance requirements and design criteria.


A. Product Test Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance requirements for as-manufactured containment and static pressure loss, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.




A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of fume hood finish provided. Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged fume hood finish.


A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or another suitable material.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fume hoods until building is enclosed, wet work and utility roughing-in are complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support fume hoods by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Constant Volume Fume Hoods with Steel Exterior:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Labconco Corporation; Protector XStream Laboratory Hoods model #110410002 or comparable product approved by one of the following:

a. Kewaunee Scientific b. Jamestown.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory fume hoods from single manufacturer.

C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, types, and configurations of fume hoods by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' fume hoods of similar sizes, types, and configurations, and complying with the Specifications, may be considered. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."


A. Containment: Provide fume hoods that comply with the following when tested according to ASHRAE 110 as modified below:

1. As-Manufactured (AM) Rating: AM 0.05 (0.05 ppm). 2. As-Installed (AI) Rating: AI 0.05 (0.05 ppm). 3. Average Face Velocity: 60 fpm plus or minus 10 percent with sashes fully open. 100

fpm with sash at 18 inch open. 4. Face-Velocity Variation: Not more than 5 percent of average face velocity across the face

opening with sashes fully open. 5. Sash Position: Fully open and 18 inch open.

6. Release Rate: 4.0 L/min.




7. Test Setup Modifications: Conduct tests with a minimum of three and a maximum of five people in the test room and with two 1-gal. round paint cans, one 12-by-12-by-12-inch cardboard box, and three 6-by-6-by-12-inch cardboard boxes in the fume hood during the test. Position items from 6 to 10 inches behind the sash, randomly distributed, and supported off the work surface by 2-by-2-inch blocks.

8. Walk-by Test: At the conclusion of containment test, execute three rapid walk-bys at 30-second intervals, 12 inches behind the mannequin. Test-gas concentration during each walk-by shall not exceed 0.1 ppm and shall return to specified containment value within 15 seconds.

B. Static-Pressure Loss: Not more than 1/2-inch wg at 100-fpm face velocity with sash fully open when measured at four locations 90 degrees apart around the exhaust duct and at least three duct diameters downstream from duct collar.

C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design fume hoods for seismic performance.

D. Seismic Performance: Fume hoods, including attachments to other work, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project is indicated on the structural drawings.


2.3 FUME HOODS

A. Product Standards: Comply with SEFA 1, "Laboratory Fume Hoods - Recommended Practices." Provide fume hoods UL listed and labeled for compliance with UL 1805.

B. Constant-Volume Fume Hoods: Provide constant-volume fume hoods with bypass.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Glass: Clear, laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with two plies not less than 3.0 mm thick and with clear, polyvinyl butyral interlayer.

1. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

2. Permanently mark safety glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Fasteners: Provide stainless-steel fasteners where exposed to fumes.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Assemble fume hoods in factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble fume hoods only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Fume hoods shall be capable of being partly disassembled as necessary to permit movement through a 35-by-79-inch door opening.



B. Steel Exterior: Fabricate from steel sheet, 0.048 inch thick, with component parts screwed together to allow removal of end panels, front fascia, and airfoil and to allow access to plumbing lines and service fittings. Apply chemical-resistant finish to interior and exterior surfaces of component parts before assembly.

C. Ends: Fabricate with double-wall end panels without projecting corner posts or other obstructions to interfere with smooth, even airflow. Close area between double walls at front of fume hood and as needed to house sash counterbalance weights, utility lines, and remote-control valves.

D. Splay top and sides of face opening to provide an aerodynamic shape to ensure smooth, even flow of air into fume hood.

E. Interior Lining: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Glass-fiber-reinforced polyester, not less than 3/16 inch thick.

F. Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Lining: Molded unit consisting of end panels, back panel, preset rear baffle, and top bonded together into a single piece; reinforced to form a rigid assembly to which exterior is attached.

1. Punch fume hood lining side panels to receive service fittings and remote controls. Provide removable plug buttons for holes not used for indicated fittings.

G. Exhaust Plenum: Full width of fume hood and with adequate volume to provide uniform airflow from hood, of same material as hood lining, and with duct stub for exhaust connection.

1. Duct-Stub Material: stainless steel.

H. Bypass Grilles: Provide grilles at bypass openings of fume hoods.

I. Sashes: Provide operable sashes of type indicated.

1. Fabricate from 0.048-inch- thick steel sheet, with chemical-resistant finish. Form into four-sided frame with bottom corners welded and finished smooth. Make top member removable for glazing replacement. Set glazing in chemical-resistant, U-shaped gaskets.

2. Glaze with laminated safety glass. 3. Counterbalance vertical-sliding sash with sash weight and stainless-steel cable system to

hold sash in place regardless of position. Provide ball-bearing sheaves, plastic glides in stainless-steel guides, and stainless-steel lift handles. Provide rubber bumpers at top and bottom of each sash unit.

4. Fabricate sashes from 0.236-inch- thick, unframed polycarbonate sliding in polypropylene tracks. Counterbalance sashes with PVC-encased weights hung from polypropylene ropes that run over polypropylene pulleys.

J. Airfoil: Unless otherwise indicated, provide airfoil at bottom of fume hood face opening with 1-inch space between airfoil and work top. Sash closes on top of airfoil, leaving 1-inch opening for air intake. Airfoil directs airflow across work top to remove heavier-than-air gases and to prevent reverse airflow.

1. Fabricate airfoil from stainless steel coated with polytetrafluoroethylene or polyvinylidene fluoride.

K. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between fume hoods and adjacent building construction. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as fume hoods.

L. Comply with requirements in other Sections for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings, piping, electrical devices, and wiring. Install according to Shop Drawings. Securely anchor fittings, piping, and conduit to fume hoods unless otherwise indicated. Provide single point connection at top of hood.



2.6 FUME HOOD CASEWORK, WORK TOPS, AND SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Work Tops: Epoxy.

1. Work-Top Configuration: Raised (marine) edge with rounded edge and corners. 2. Where epoxy sinks occur in epoxy work tops, provide integral sinks bonded to tops with

invisible joint line. 3. Color: Black

B. Acid “Corrosive” Storage

1. Completely lined with a polyethylene corrosion resistant liner. The liner is 3/16 inch thick, with a vacuum formed PVC liner pan at the bottom to contain spills. Each door has a 3/16 inch sheet polyethylene liner.

2. The cabinet is labeled: "ACID". 3. Flush pull handles are ABS, low gloss black. 4. Each cabinet is vented into the fume hood with a 1-1/2 inch vent pipe. It should provide a

positive airflow directly into the fume hood exhaust system. 5. Supply an epoxy coated steel shelf with PVC liner pan. 6. Acid cabinets with louvers are not acceptable.

C. Solvent “Flammable” Storage

1. Solvent storage cabinets are specifically designed for the storage of flammable and combustible liquids.

2. Solvent Storage Cabinet must be compliant with NFPA 30 “Flammability and Combustible Liquids Code.”

3. Cabinets 30 inches wide and greater shall be tested and approved by Factory Mutual to meet Factory Mutual Approval Standard 6050.

4. The bottoms, top, sides, and doors are fabricated of 18 gauge steel and are all double panel construction with a 1-1/2 inch air space between panels.

5. All joints are welded or screwed to provide a rigid enclosure. A 2 inch deep liquid tight pan that covers the entire bottom of the cabinet is furnished to contain liquid leaks and spills.

6. A full-depth, 18 gauge steel, adjustable shelf is also provided. Shelves are sealed leak tight.

7. Two diametrically opposed flame arrestor vents with spark screens are provided in the back of the cabinet, as well as a grounding screw.

8. The cabinet has an interior finish same as the exterior. 9. The cabinet is labeled: "FLAMMABLE KEEP FIRE AWAY". 10. The right hand door shall have a three point latching device. 11. Door handles include a key lock. Solvent storage handles are locking lever handles with

bright chrome finish. 12. Self-closing/self-latching models shall be provided with a fusible link feature to ensure the

doors will close if the temperature outside the cabinet exceeds 165 degrees Fahrenheit. The doors are synchronized so that both doors will fully close.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1. 115v, 20A, GFCI duplex outlet with stainless steel cover plate.

2.7 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT FINISH

A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after welding. Prepare, treat, and finish components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces.



B. Preparation: Clean steel surfaces, other than stainless steel, of mill scale, rust, oil, and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.

C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply fume hood manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8M. Acceptance level for chemical spot test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.

2. Colors for Fume Hood Finish: Custom color to match metal cabinets in the same room.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Airflow Indicator and Alarm: Provide each fume hood with flow indicators and low flow alarms.

B. All fume hoods shall have a presence sensor mounted on the front of the hood to reduce airflow from 100 fpm to 60 fpm when no one is standing within 2 feet of the hood.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fume hoods.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fume hoods according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims, and securely anchor to building and adjacent laboratory casework. Securely attach access panels but provide for easy removal and secure reattachment. Where fume hoods abut other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.

B. Comply with requirements for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings and electrical devices.

1. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink and work top-mounted fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or work-top material. Securely anchor fittings to fume hoods unless otherwise indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage qualified independent testing agency to inspect laboratory fume hoods, and to furnish reports to Owner and Architect.

B. Field test installed fume hoods according to "Flow Visualization and Velocity Procedure" requirements in ASHRAE 110.

1. Test one installed fume hood, selected by Architect, for each type of hood installed, according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance Requirements" Article.



C. Field test installed fume hoods according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance Requirements" Article to verify compliance with performance requirements.

1. Adjust fume hoods, hood exhaust fans, and building's HVAC system, or replace hoods and make other corrections until tested hoods perform as specified.

2. After making corrections, retest fume hoods that failed to perform as specified.


A. Adjust moving parts for smooth, near silent, accurate sash operation with one hand. Adjust sashes for uniform contact of rubber bumpers. Verify that counterbalances operate without interference.

B. Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.



115319 - 1 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

SECTION 115319 - LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide and install equipment listed below:

1. Autoclave/Sterilizers 2. Local extractors.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

B. National Electric Code (NEC)

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

E. Industrial Ventilation Manual 17th Edition, or newer.

F. American Society of Heating Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)

G. As applicable to individual equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Materials List and Product Data: Submit complete materials list, including manufacturer's brochures and catalog data of materials, equipment, and products for work specified in this Section.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings showing sizes, included items, fastening methods, and mounting techniques.

2. Furnish installation drawings indicating rough-ins for plumbing, wiring, piping, ventilating and service requirements.

3. Provide drawing of shroud design for each condition; at the wall, back to back, and freestanding.

C. Anchorage: Provide detailed drawings of seismic anchorage systems.

D. Certifications:

1. Submit certification stating that items in this Section are installed per applicable and referenced codes, standards, specifications, and complete and ready for intended function.

2. Provide written certification that finish complies with specified criteria.

E. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit complete operating and maintenance manuals for each hood type and size that describe proper operating procedures, maintenance and replacement schedules, components parts list, and nearest local factory representative for components and emergency repairs.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturers shall have established organization and production facilities specializing in producing the type of equipment specified, with an experienced engineering department. Each shall have the demonstrated ability and capacity to produce and deliver the specified equipment within the required time limits.



B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, types, and configurations of laboratory equipment and may reference designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Any deviations from the Drawings or Specifications, including requests for approval of proposed equals, must be listed in detail. Identify all deviations in physical size and utility service requirements from those listed for the Basis of Design manufacturer at the time of submission of bids, so that the owner can properly evaluate the total cost of the equipment and installation. Failure to identify physical size and utility service requirement’s deviations will not relieve bidder of responsibility for lost of subsequent required service modifications to accommodate its equipment. Submit list of deviations with the Bidder’s proposal.

C. Provide manufacturer certification and /or testing documentation that each piece of equipment and each component complies with the following minimum requirements:

1. UL listed 2. NSF certification 3. ISO 9001 compliance


A. Deliver laboratory equipment after painting, utility roughing-in, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate equipment has been completed in installation areas. If equipment must be stored in non-installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified in Project Conditions section below.

B. Deliver each item of equipment in manufacturer's packaging and crating with contents clearly identified and properly marked.

C. Store and handle each item of equipment to prevent damage. Provide temporary skids under items weighing more than 150 pounds.

D. Use means necessary to protect work during and after installation. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and/or replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and at no additional cost to the Owner.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install laboratory equipment until building is enclosed, wet-work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through remainder of construction period.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Work in this Section requires close coordination with work in electrical and mechanical sections. Coordinate work to assure an orderly progress in the project, without removal of previously installed work, and to prevent damage to finishes and products.

B. Coordinate reinforcement as necessary for support of laboratory equipment.

C. Coordinate laboratory equipment layout and installation with other work, including lighting fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression system components.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide a list of manufacturer’s available warranties with submission of bid. Provide the following minimum warranties:

1. Fifteen years warranty on vessel integrity for autoclaves. 2. Minimum one year for defects in materials and workmanship, including parts and labor.



1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Cost of maintenance agreement shall be a separate line item and not factored into the cost of equipment. The vendor shall guarantee that the Owner will receive no adverse treatment regarding parts if the Owner chooses not to purchase the maintenance agreement.

B. Equipment supplier shall provide a technical response (actual presence or by phone) within four (4) hours or the service call will be provided at no cost to the Owner.

C. Equipment supplier shall provide diagnostic equipment necessary for maintenance.

1.10 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT, GENERAL

A. Equipment Responsibility:

1. Contractor Furnished, Contractor Installed (CFCI) Equipment: New equipment to be furnished and installed by the Contractor as part of the Work. Contractor shall receive, install and make final connections to the equipment as described in the applicable drawings and sections of the Specifications. All work is CFCI unless noted as OFOI or OFCI.

2. Owner Furnished, Owner Installed (OFOI) Equipment: New or existing equipment that will be furnished or relocated and installed by the Owner. Contractor shall confirm and provide services required for each piece of OFOI equipment in the Equipment schedule up to the point of connection to the equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for final connection of equipment.

3. Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed (OFCI) Equipment: New or existing piece of equipment that will be relocated by the owner but installed by Contractor. Contractor shall make final connections to the equipment as described in manufacturer’s equipment manual.

B. Basis of Design Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated by specific manufacturers and model numbers listed below. These products are used as an example of design standards and quality for materials, construction, and components. Other listed manufacturers may propose substitutes to the listed products provided that their equipment can meet quality, performance and design established by the referenced design basis and the requirements of these specifications. Comply with requirements in Division 1 sections "Submittal Procedures” and “Product Requirements." Show compliance with requirements. Where Basis of Design products are indicated, provide all standard features, materials and measuring systems whether or not specifically listed in the specification.

C. Provide each equipment item with the manufacturer's standard features and accessories as well as any other accessories, options or special configurations shown on the drawings or elsewhere in the specifications. For recessed or freestanding equipment, provide trim panels matching equipment material and finish to close opening between equipment and adjacent walls, floors and ceilings, and where indicated on Drawings.

D. Manufacturer shall provide a break down on pricing if some or any of their components, materials or options deviates from what is listed in this specification, so it can be considered by the owner in their final decision.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTOCLAVE/STERILIZERS

A. Small Autoclave / Sterilizer:

1. Basis-of-design product: Steris, Amsco Lab 250LS Small Sterilizer.



2. Provide small autoclave/sterilizer manufactured by one of the following:

a. Steris Corp 5960 Heisley Rd. Mentor, OH 44060-1834 440-354-2600

b. Getinge USA, Inc. 1777 E. Henrietta Rd. Rochester, NY 14623-3133 800-475-9040

3. Chamber size: 20 inches wide by 20 inches high by 38 inches deep. 4. Provide the Prevacuum type. 5. Single door. 6. Recessed. 7. Provide integral carbon steel electric steam generator (208V). 8. Automatic flush of steam generator upon startup of sterilizer. Flush can be manually by-

passed. 9. Provide air compressor (115V) 10. Provide vacuum pump (120V, 1-PH / 480V, 3-PH). 11. Provide integral backflow preventer for protection of water supply. 12. Provide seismic tie-down kit. 13. Controls to have electronic and paper printer capabilities. 14. Provide water conservation system using facility supply. The system utilizes a mixing

tank and a series of heat exchangers, integrated with the chilled water loop, to cool and recycle vacuum pump water and effluent. Water temperature is constantly monitored to minimize the need to add fresh cool water to the mixing tank.

15. Accessories:

a. Intermediate shelf.

B. Large (Bulk) Steam Sterilizer:

1. Basis-of-design product: Steris, Amsco Lab LSS91521 Large Sterilizer. 2. Provide large autoclave/sterilizer manufactured by one of the following:

a. Steris Corp 5960 Heisley Rd. Mentor, OH 44060-1834 440-354-2600

b. Getinge USA, Inc. 1777 E. Henrietta Rd. Rochester, NY 14623-3133 800-475-9040

3. Chamber size: 37 inches wide by 61 inches high by 85 inches deep. 4. Recessed. 5. Single door. 6. Pit Moutned. 7. Sterilizer Voltage: 480V, 60Hz, 3-PH. 8. Safety Features:

a. Emergency stop button. b. Door sensing device to automatically stop chamber door movement if obstruction

is detected. c. Steam valve interlock.



d. Pressure interlock.

9. Options and Accessories:

a. Self cleaning drain strainer with valve on the strainer clean-out screen. During fast exhaust the strainer is cleaned of debris using steam flow.

b. Utility shutoff valves – manual valves on incoming utility for shut off and isolation during maintenance.

c. Cooling water saving package designed to utilize facility chilled water supply to minimize the consumption of the facility’s supply water. This is done by first cooling and recirculating the initial charge of vacuum pump seal water through a heat exchanger and back to the break tank, and second, cooling the chamber effluent with a heat exchanger.

d. Seismic Tie-Down Kit. e. Two half-length loading carts. f. Two perforated shelves for each half-length cart.

2.2 LOCAL EXTRACTORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Nedeman Extraction Arm FX100 ESD/EX (part no. 70590344) with FWN 400/50 Nozzle.

B. General: Local extractor with articulating joints, suitable for evacuation of airborne contaminants.

C. Construction:

1. Anodized aluminum tubes with air-tight dampers. 2. Ball-bearing supported adjustable friction joints in polypropylene with guide rings of low

friction treated rubber.

a. Number: 3 joints per unit.

3. Size: 4 inch diameter. 4. Air Movement: 265 CFM. 5. Hoods: Nozzle type. 6. Mounting: Ceiling. 7. Temperature Operating Range: -5 degrees F to 176 degrees F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prior to start of WORK examine surfaces and areas to receive laboratory equipment and verify that surfaces are re-clean, dry and that preparatory WORK is complete.

B. Proceed with WORK when conditions will permit WORK to be installed in complete accordance with the original re-design, accepted submittals, and the manufacturer's printed instruction.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with accepted submittals, as necessary for the intended function, and as a complete operating system.

1. Install per manufacturer's engineered seismic anchorage details. 2. Prepare for final connection of equipment to mechanical and electrical WORK by others,

unless otherwise noted. 3. Install in locations shown.



B. Install equipment square, level, consistent with best practice for installation of this type of laboratory equipment, and as indicated.


A. Adjust equipment and services to operate correctly and smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating parts as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

C. Touch up and restore any factory finishes partially damaged or defaced during delivery, relocation, and installation. Repair or remove and replace defective WORK as approved by the Owner's Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.4 TRAINING

A. Deliver operation and maintenance manuals.

B. Provide on-site training for up to six (6) people in proper use and maintenance of equipment.

C. Provide a hands-on, start-up session with supplier, maintenance personnel, and end users. There shall be a separate operational session and maintenance session.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Units shall be protected after installation during remainder of construction.



123553.13 - 1

LABORATORY CASEWORK

SECTION 123553.13 - LABORATORY CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal laboratory casework. 2. Filler and closure panels. 3. Laboratory countertops. 4. Tables. 5. Shelves. 6. Laboratory accessories.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of laboratory casework.

B. Coordinate installation of laboratory casework with installation of fume hoods and other laboratory equipment.



B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

1. Indicate types and sizes of cabinets. 2. Indicate locations of hardware and keying of locks. 3. Indicate locations and types of service fittings. 4. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing laboratory

casework. 5. Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits and piping. 6. Include details of support framing system. 7. Include details of exposed conduits, if required, for service fittings. 8. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building

components, and other laboratory equipment. 9. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections.


1. 6-inch-square Samples for each metal color. 2. 6-inch- square Samples for each type of countertop material. 3. One of each type of hardware item specified.


A. Product Test Reports for Casework: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory casework with requirements of specified product standard.

B. Product Test Reports for Countertop Surface Material: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory countertop surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.


123553.13 - 2

LABORATORY CASEWORK


A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of metal laboratory casework provided. Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that produces casework of types indicated for this Project that has been tested for compliance with SEFA 8 M.


A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install laboratory casework until building is enclosed, utility roughing-in and wet work are complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support casework by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements for metal laboratory casework and accessories, provide products by one of the following:

1. ICI Scientific 2. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation; Laboratory Products Group. 3. Mott

B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework from single source from single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of laboratory casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' laboratory casework of similar sizes and similar door and drawer configurations and complying with Specifications may be considered. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."


A. System Structural Performance: Laboratory casework and support framing system shall withstand the effects of the following gravity loads and stresses without permanent deformation, excessive deflection, or binding of drawers and doors:

1. Support Framing System: 600 lb/ft.. 2. Base Cabinets (Internal Load): 200 lb/ft.. 3. Work Surfaces: 200 lb/ft.. 4. Wall Cabinets (Upper Cabinets): 200 lb/ft.. 5. Shelves: 40 lb/sq. ft..






123553.13 - 3

LABORATORY CASEWORK

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design laboratory casework and support framing system, including attachments to other work.

2.3 CASEWORK, GENERAL

A. Casework Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8 M, "Laboratory Grade Metal Casework".

2.4 METAL CABINET AND TABLE MATERIALS

A. Metal: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Nominal Metal Thickness:

1. Sides, Ends, Fixed Backs, Bottoms, Tops, Soffits, and Items Not Otherwise Indicated: 0.048 inch. Except for flammable liquid storage cabinets, bottoms may be 0.036 inch if reinforced.

2. Back Panels, Doors, Drawer Fronts and Bodies, and Shelves: 0.036 inch except 0.048 inch for back panels and doors of flammable liquid storage cabinets and for unreinforced shelves more than 36 inches long.

3. Intermediate Horizontal Rails, Table Aprons and Cross Rails, Center Posts, and Top Gussets: 0.060 inch.

4. Drawer Runners, Sink Supports, and Hinge Reinforcements: 0.075 inch. 5. Leveling and Corner Gussets: 0.105 inch.

2.5 COUNTERTOP TABLETOP, SHELF, AND MATERIALS

A. Epoxy: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular finish.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Durcon Company.

2. Physical Properties:

a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi. b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi. c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100. d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent. e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F.

3. Chemical Resistance: Composite countertop material has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:

a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent), benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60 percent), and toluene.

b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).

4. Backsplash: 4 inch high at all vertical surfaces. 5. Color: Black.







123553.13 - 4

LABORATORY CASEWORK

2.6 METAL CABINETS AND TABLES

A. Fabrication: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on precision jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and channels. Except where otherwise specified, integrally frame and weld cabinet bodies to form dirt- and vermin-resistant enclosures. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink support. Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.

B. Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-height channel reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors with noncombustible, sound-deadening material.

C. Hinged Doors: Mortise for hinges and reinforce with angles welded inside inner pans at hinge edge.

D. Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with no raw metal edges at top. Sides, back, and bottom fabricated in one piece with rolled or formed top of sides for stiffening and comfortable grasp for drawer removal. Provide drawers with rubber bumpers, polymer roller slides, and positive stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact or accidental removal.

E. Adjustable Shelves: Front, back, and ends formed down, with edges returned horizontally at front and back to form reinforcing channels.

F. Toe Space: Fully enclosed, 4 inches high by 3 inches deep, with no open gaps or pockets.

G. Utilities: Provide space, cutouts, and holes for pipes, conduits, and fittings in cabinet bodies to accommodate utility services and their support-strut assemblies.

1. Provide base cabinets with removable backs for access to utility space.

H. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide knee-space panels (modesty panels) at spaces between base cabinets, where indicated. Fabricate from back-to-back panels or of hollow construction to eliminate exposed hemmed or flanged edges.

2. Provide utility-space closure panels at spaces between base cabinets where utility space would otherwise be exposed, including spaces below countertops.

3. Provide closure panels at ends of utility spaces where utility space would otherwise be exposed.

2.7 METAL CABINET FINISH

A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces.

B. Preparation: After assembly, clean surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.

C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply laboratory casework manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.


123553.13 - 5

LABORATORY CASEWORK

1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8 M. Acceptance level for chemical spot test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.

2. Colors for Metal Laboratory Casework Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.8 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type.

B. Hinges: Stainless-steel, five-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide two for doors 48 inches high or less and three for doors more than 48 inches high.

C. Hinged Door and Drawer Pulls: Back-mounted pulls. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide.

1. Design: Rectangular loop pulls with rounded corners. Stainless steel wire pulls. 2. Overall Size: 1-1/4 by 4-1/2 inches.

D. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catches. Provide two catches on doors more than 48 inches high.

E. Drawer Slides: Side mounted, epoxy-coated steel, self-closing; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.

1. Provide Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 incheshigh and 24 inches wide. 2. Provide Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 incheshigh or 24 inches wide. 3. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Full-overtravel-extension,

ball-bearing type.

2.9 LABORATORY ACCESSORIES

A. Adjustable Open Shelving:

1. All shelf supports shall be powder coated cold rolled steel. 2. Shelves shall overhang 2 inches behind the face of the vertical tubular support. 3. Shelf brackets: 11 gauge stainless steel. 4. Vertical shelf adjustment: one inch increments. 5. All shelves shall incorporate a reversible shelf retainer lip that is capable of being

positioned in the raised or flush position. Shelf lips can be repositioned with the use of simple hand tools. Provide front 3/8 inch diameter stainless steel retaining rod 1-1/4 inches above shelf.

6. Shelves can be mounted to wall frames, wall standards, or rear frames. 7. Load capacity: 40 pounds per linear foot up to 200 pounds on a 60 inch wide unit.

B. Pegboards: Epoxy pegboards with removable polypropylene pegs and stainless-steel drip troughs with drain outlet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



123553.13 - 6

LABORATORY CASEWORK

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical. Do not exceed the following tolerances:

1. Variation of Tops of Base Cabinets from Level: 1/16 inch in 10 feet. 2. Variation of Bottoms of Upper Cabinets from Level: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3. Variation of Faces of Cabinets from a True Plane: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 4. Variation of Adjacent Surfaces from a True Plane (Lippage): 1/32 inch. 5. Variation in Alignment of Adjacent Door and Drawer Edges: 1/16 inch.

B. Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with two fasteners at each frame. Fasten to partition framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base cabinets.

C. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions, with fasteners spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.

1. Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space at not more than 24 inches o.c. and at sides of cabinets with not less than two fasteners per side.

D. Wall Cabinets and Shelving: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 16 inches o.c.

E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.

F. Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate joints only where indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in same manner as shop-made joints, using dowels, splines, fasteners, adhesives, and sealants recommended by manufacturer. Shop prepare edges for field-made joints.

1. Use concealed clamping devices for field-made joints in epoxy resing countertops. Locate clamping devices within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a uniform heavy pressure at joints.

C. Fastening:

1. Secure countertops to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.

2. Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads approximately 1/8 inch, and plug hole flush with material equal to countertop in chemical resistance, hardness, and appearance.

D. Provide required holes and cutouts for service fittings.


123553.13 - 7

LABORATORY CASEWORK

E. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Match materials and finish to adjacent laboratory casework. Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer.

F. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF LABORATORY ACCESSORIES

A. Install accessories according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports, coat hooks and pegboards to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.

C. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.

D. Securely fasten pegboards to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c.



123553.13 - 8

LABORATORY CASEWORK



METAL COUNTERTOPS 123616 - 1

SECTION 123616 - METAL COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes stainless-steel tables, countertops and sinks.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealant, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail fabrication and installation, including field joints.


A. Deliver metal countertops only after casework has been completed in installation areas.

B. Keep finished surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during handling and installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction to receive metal countertops by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. System Structural Performance: Metal countertops and support framing system shall withstand the effects of the following gravity loads and stresses without permanent deformation, excessive deflection, or binding of drawers and doors:

1. Support Framing System: 600 lb/ft.. 2. Work Surfaces: 200 lb/ft.. 3. Shelves: 40 lb/sq. ft..

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design laboratory casework and support framing system, including attachments to other work.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone .

2. Color: Clear. 3. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.



2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL TABLES, COUNTERTOPS AND SINKS

A. Tables: Welded tubing legs, not less than 2 inches square with channel stretchers as needed to comply with product standard. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs to table aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg.

1. Leg Shoes: Satin-finished, stainless-steel, open-bottom, slip-on type.

B. Countertops: Fabricate from 0.062-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet. Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane, free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over the base cabinets.

1. Joints: Fabricate tables and countertops without field-made joints. 2. Weld shop-made joints. 3. Sound deaden the undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating. 4. Extend the top down to provide a 1-inch- thick edge with a 1/2-inchreturn flange. 5. Form the backsplash coved to and integral with top surface, with a 1/2-inch-thick top

edge and 1/2-inch return flange. 6. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of tops containing sinks; pitch tops

containing sinks two ways to provide drainage without channeling or grooving. 7. Where stainless-steel sinks occur in stainless-steel tops, factory weld into one integral

unit.

C. Stainless-Steel Sinks: Fabricate from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inchnominal thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least 5/8-inchradius. Slope the sink bottoms to outlet without channeling or grooving. Provide continuous butt-welded joints.

1. Provide sizes indicated or manufacturer's closest standard size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Architect.

2. Provide double-wall construction for sink partitions with top edge rounded to at least 1/2-inch diameter.

3. Factory punch holes for fittings. 4. Provide sinks with stainless-steel strainers and tailpieces. 5. Provide sinks with integral rims except where located in stainless-steel countertops. 6. Apply 1/8-inch- thick coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to undersink

surfaces.

2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH

A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4 finish, with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of metal countertops.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install metal countertops level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.



B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make field jointing in the same manner as shop jointing; use fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.

C. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent; use two or more fasteners at each front, end, and back.

D. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection.

E. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.

F. Wall-Mounted Shelves: Fasten to masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each shelf through upturned back edge at not less than 24 incheso.c.


A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.

B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

C. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over the countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 incheso.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion.


University of Missouri

East Campus Plant Growth Facilities

Complex Phase 1 – #CP170281

CannonDesign Project No. 005143.00

CONTROLLED TEMPERATURE ROOMS 130383 - 1

SECTION 130383 – CONTROLLED TEMPERATURE ROOMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to

provide and install control Environmental Rooms as indicated on Drawings and schedules.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type environmental room equipment required. Include manufacturer's

model number and accessories and requirements for access and maintenance clearances,

water and drainage, power, and service-connections including roughing-in dimensions.

B. Shop Drawings: plans, elevations, sections, fabrication details, service requirements, and

attachments to other work.

1. Submit shop drawings, including fully dimensioned plan view, elevation and sections at

not less than ¼ inch scale. Drawings shall include overall panel layout, panel finishes,

doors, accessories, hardware, control panels, refrigeration equipment, refrigerant,

refrigeration piping, condensate lines, utility requirements, connection points, and all

other information required for proper coordination with related work.

2. Schematics and Calculations: Submit all calculations necessary to demonstrate

compliance with load requirements contained herein, including cooling, heating,

humidification and/or dehumidification load calculations as applicable. Provide electrical

schematic showing all power and control system components, including voltages and

amperage loads. Provide refrigeration piping schematic showing all system components

clearly identified.

3. Equipment schedule indicating operating temperature/humidity conditions, utility

requirements, and model/quantity forall evaporator coils, condensing units, dehumidifiers,

humidifiers, and controls.

4. Wiring Diagrams: Details of wiring for power, signal, and control systems and

differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

5. Piping/Ductwork Diagrams: Details of piping/ductwork systems and differentiating

between manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping and ductwork.

C. Closeout submittals shall be submitted prior to substantial completion, and shall include:

1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, including startup, operation, and maintenance

instructions, replacement parts list, and factory contact information.

2. Test reports: Submit reports of all specified factory and field performance tests.

3. Certificate of Warranty, with warranty period commencing on date of substantial

completion.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of refrigeration systems or their authorized

agents certifying that systems furnished comply with requirements and will maintain operating

temperatures indicated in the areas or equipment that they will serve.

E. Maintenance Data: Operation, maintenance, and parts data for environmental rooms, to

include: in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be factory trained and shall have a minimum of 10 years’

experience in the installation of laboratory controlled environment rooms.






B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing environmental rooms.

Controlled environment room(s) shall be produced by a manufacturer with a minimum of 10

years’ experience in manufacturing equipment of the same type and scope of project specified

herein. A minimum of 200 rooms shall have been fabricated and installed within the past 5

years. Manufacturer shall submit a statement of qualification with the submittal materials.

C. Single Source Responsibility. Controlled environment rooms shall be designed, manufactured

and installed by one supplier for single source responsibility.

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate environmental rooms based on the specific products

indicated. Other manufacturers' equipment with equal size and performance characteristics

may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following codes:

1. ASHRAE/ANSI: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Engineers, Standard 15-1994 – Refrigeration Components, Safety and Use of

Refrigerants.

2. FM: Factory Mutual Standard #4880 – Insulated Panel Construction.

3. NEC: National Electrical Code.

4. NSF: National Sanitary Foundation Seal of Approval – Room Panels.

5. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, 508A – Industrial Control Panels.

6. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, 723 – Room Panel Flame Spread Ratings.


A. Wrap and crate components to prevent damage during shipping and handling.

B. Protect products and exposed finishes during room erection.

C. Do not deliver materials to site until time of installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of environmental room installation areas by field

measurements before equipment fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings and

Coordination Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid

delaying the Work.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with other work, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, and fire-suppression system components.

B. Coordinate location and requirements of service-utility connections.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of

other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be

in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under

requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer

agreeing to repair or replace compressors that fail in materials or workmanship within the

specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Breakage.

2. Faulty operation.







C. Insulated Panel Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer stating that

product is free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use and service within the

specified warranty period:

1. Warranty period: 10 years from Substantial Completion.

D. Parts and Labor warranty: Submit a written warranty agreeing to replace or repair miscellaneous

parts that fail in materials or workmanship under normal use and service within the specified

warranty period:

1. Warranty period: One (1) year from Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CHAMBER DESIGN LOADS

A. Ambient conditions: Rooms shall be designed to operate in ambient conditions ranging from

60°F to 85°F, and at humidity levels ranging from 15% to 75%RH.

B. Door openings: Temperature and humidity calculations shall assume two (2) door openings per

hour for an average duration of 30 seconds each.

C. Water Temperature Range: Water-cooled condensing units shall designed for water

temperatures from 50°F to 85°F at water inlet.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide environmental rooms.

1. BioCold Enviromental, Inc., Fenton, Missouri, (636)349-0300 Specifications are based on

products from this manufacturer.

2. Acceptable Alternative: Conviron Harris Environmental Systems, Inc. Andover MA

(978)470-8600.

3. Other Manufacturers in strict accordance with the drawings and specifications will be

considered subject to Architect and Owner approval. Substitute products must be

submitted in accordance with Section 1.E Special Conditions, paragraph 10.

2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:

A. Modular Panel Construction: Wall and ceiling panels shall be prefabricated modular

construction consisting of 100% foamed-in-place urethane insulation 4” thick, bonded by an

adhesive to the interior and the exterior metal pan skins and heat cured for life long stability.

Each wall panel skin is to be formed using a double 90 bend on each edge to add strength and

rigidity. Panels are to be in widths of 6 inch increments, with a minimum width of 6 inches and a

maximum width of 48 inches. All panels are to bear the UL label. Sections shall match without

distortion and shall be aligned by tongue and groove joints, and fastened by cam lock devices.

The resulting panel joints shall be sealed by a foamed-in-place, continuous one piece gasket.

1. Panel joints are to be precisely formed male and female tongue and groove shapes

fabricated to force the male edge to contact the female edge, providing additional seal. The

panel edge shall have a gasket which provides a positive seal that meets NSF standards.

Gasket shall be “locked” to the skins and run in a continuous piece, completely around the

panel with only one break to provide the optimal seal. Gasket is locked to the skins by

means of being foamed-in-place as an integral part of the finished panel. The gasket is to fit

completely around the double 90 bend on the edge of the panel skin.






2. Panel insulation: Panels shall contain 100% urethane insulation and have no internal wood

or structural members between the skins. The metal skins shall be placed into heated

molds and liquid urethane injected between them. Urethane insulation shall have a

minimum compressive strength of 28 pounds per square inch and shall be minimum 97%

closed cell structure. Insulated panels shall comply with current EPA Regulations.

3. Assembly: Panels shall be joined by non-corrosive cam action speed locks, consisting of a

hooked locking arm placed in one panel, and a steel rod positioned in the adjoining panel,

so that when the arm is rotated, the hook engages the rod and draws the panels tightly

together with cam action. Arms and rods shall be housed in individual steel pockets.

Pockets on one side of the panel shall be connected to pockets on the other side in width,

by the use of 2” wide metal straps set into and completely surrounded by the insulation.

Each vertical joint shall contain a minimum of three locking devices, and the distance

between locks shall not exceed 46”. Seal wrench holes with flush-mounted plastic,

aluminum or stainless steel caps.

4. Certifications:

a. Panels shall comply with the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (EISA)

and shall further carry a minimum insulating value of R-29 for coolers and R-32 for

freezers.

b. Panels shall be certified by Underwriters Laboratories as having a flame spread of

25 or lower and a smoke generation of 450 or lower when tested in accordance

with ASTM E84.

c. Panels shall be NSF certified.

B. Supply panels with PVC extruded floor sealers with semi-flexible edges, which seal wall panels

to floor without the use of exposed fasteners. Sealer shall meet NSF requirements for floor

cove molding.

C. Ceiling panels: Shall be a full 4 inches thick with one piece foamed-in-place edge caps. Metal

face skins are to incorporate seams using a double 90 bend at a maximum width of two feet for

additional strength.

1. Provide galvanized hanger brackets which securely lock between ceiling panels. Brackets

to be designed to support the ceiling span. Provide 3” x 3” angle support between

brackets. Specification Section 11610 is responsible for providing and installing hanger

straps to structure.

2. Ceiling panels shall be reinforced as required to support CER equipment loads and

maintenance trafficon top of room.

D. Finishes:

1. Ceiling Topside: 26 gauge smooth galvanized steel with a white polyester enamel finish.

2. Interior Walls and Ceiling: 26 gauge galvanized steel with a white polyester enamel finish.

3. Exterior Walls: 26 gauge embossed galvanized steel with a white polyester enamel finish.

4. Wall and ceiling panels shall contain all required junction boxes and electrical conduit

foamed in place and not surface mounted. Surface-mounted conduit exposed within the

room shall be avoided.






E. Standard Hinged Entrance Doors

1. Doors shall be in-fitting, flush mounted type with a minimum clear opening of 36” x 78”

unless otherwise shown on drawings, with the same metal finish and insulation as

adjacent walls. A thermoplastic gasket with a magnetic core shall be mounted on the top

edge and along both sides of the door. The magnetic force of the gasket and a hydraulic

door closure shall keep the door closed and the gasket shall form a tight seal. The

bottom edge of the door shall contain a flexible, dual blade wiper gasket. All gaskets shall

be NSF approved. Construction of the door panel shall include a heavy "U" channel type

reinforced steel frame around the entire perimeter of the door opening to prevent rocking

or twisting. Provide 30” high stainless steel kickplate at interior and exterior of door and

door jambs.

2. On any room operating at +15°C or lower, anti-condensate heaters shall be connected to

a temperature switch to provide sufficient heat to eliminate condensation and frost under

various humidity conditions. Anti-condensate heater wires shall be concealed behind the

metal edge of the door jambs on all sides including the threshold plate.

3. Doors shall have a minimum of three hinges of the self-closing type with plated steel pins

and Delrin cam-type bearings. Doors of 36” or lesser width shall be fully self-closing.

4. The door latch shall be designed to open the door easily by breaking the magnetic force

of the door gasket. The latch shall have a cylinder key lock. The door shall also include

an interior safety release handle to allow for emergency exit in case of accidental

confinement. Hardware shall be satin-finish aluminum.

5. Observation Window. For visual observation into a walk-in cooler or freezer a 14" x 24"

view window shall be installed in the walk-in entrance door. Window shall be three-pane

heated tempered safety glass to prevent frost formation and fog.

2.4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

A. All operating controls, instrumentation, functional switches and major electrical components

shall be located in a single, surface-mounted control console mounted at operator eye level at

the latch side of the entrance door to each room unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

Control console shall be ADA compliant and exterior depth shall not exceed 4 inches. The

control panel shall be hinged for easy opening by authorized service personnel.

B. All room equipment except condensing unit, unless otherwise indicated on drawings, shall be

circuited through the control console and wired by CER installer, with a single-point connection

to the control console supplied by Division 16.

C. Control panel assembly shall contain only commercially available components available from

third-party suppliers. CER manufacturer’s proprietary printed circuit boards are not acceptable.

D. Overcurrent protection shall be provided within the control console. All branch circuits shall be

equipped with circuit breakers. Fuses are not permitted.

E. Control panel assembly shall be tested by a UL listed shop in accordance with NFPA 70 and UL

508A, and shall bear a UL 508A label.

F. Color Touchscreen Interface

1. User interface shall consist of a LCD color touchscreen display at least 7 inches in

diagonal with minimum resolution of 640 x 480 pixels.

2. Color touchscreen shall provide intuitive operation and sufficient on-screen instructions

such that reference manuals are not required for day-to-day operation.

3. Color touchscreen shall provide multi-level password-protected access to monitor and

adjust all chamber operating parameters, including but not limited to the following

functions:






a. Temperature setpoint

b. Real-time temperature display in 0.1°C or 0.1°F increments

c. Humidity setpoint (if applicable)

d. Real-time humidity display in 0.1% RH increments

e. User-selectable temperature display in °C or °F.

f. High & low temperature and humidity alarm setpoints

g. Alarm time delay period

h. Alarm silence with adjustable callback timer

i. Automatic, programmable defrost system with automatic bypass when operating

above 3°C, adjustable.

j. Manual defrost and manual defrost termination capabilities for testing and

maintenance.

k. Real-time system clock.

l. Real-time graphical trend data with minimum of 31 day viewable history.

m. Print and/or download trend data for minimum of 360 days in PDF or CSV format.

n. Parameter change log.

o. Alarm history log.

p. Remote access capability via Ethernet, RS-485 Modbus or similar,

non-proprietarycommunications protocol.

G. Temperature & Humidity Controller

1. Temperature and humidity control (if applicable) shall be user-selectable PID or

hysteresis control using programmable logic controller with fixed programmable logic.

Control logic shall be stored on nonvolatile memory card within the controller.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide programmable

control device by one of the following:

a. Allen-Bradley

b. Emerson Controls

c. Seimens

3. Controller shall include a minimum of six (6) open loop control circuits for lights or other

on/off switchable operations.

4. Sensors.

a. Temperature sensor shall be 100 ohm platinum RTD or Type T Thermocouple.

Temperature sensor shall be located for fast responsiveness and shall display and

control air temperature. Sensor shall not display “product temperature” or be

placed in glycol or other cold mass to improve display performance.

b. Humidity sensor shall be thin-film capacitance sensor with accuracy of ±2% RH or

better. Wet bulb/dry bulb, lithium chloride, gold grid, bulk resistance, or similar

sensors are not acceptable.

5. Temperature safety limit controls shall be provided:

a. High temperature safety limit control shall activate an alarm and shall de-energize

all electric heaters, hot gas valves, dehumidifiers and other heat-producing

equipment within the room. When temperature returns to normal range, limit

controls shall automatically reset.

b. Low temperature safety limit control shall activate an alarm and shall shut down the

refrigeration compressor. When temperature returns to normal range, limit controls

shall automatically reset.

H. Alarm Systems

1. Temperature Alarm

a. Control system to include both audible and visible alarm indicators upon high or low

alarm conditions. High/low safety alarms set digitally in 0.1°C increments.






b. Upon an alarm event, a popup text message shall appear on-screen indicating the

alarm type, alarm setpoint, and current chamber conditions. The popup text

message shall remain onscreen until the alarm condition clears or the alarm is

acknowledged by an operator.

c. Control system shall include an field adjustable alarm delay timer and alarm silence

button which will temporarily silence audible alarm buzzer. The alarm delay timer

shall be adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes before the alarm buzzer is activated.

d. Provide remote alarm dry contacts for connection to building automation or

monitoring systems. Alarm dry contacts shall be of active design, such that

contacts will close upon power failure, controller failure, or temperature alarm

event.

I. Redundant Systems

1. Rooms equipped with redundant refrigeration systems shall provide controls that perform

the following functions, adjustable by user through the touchscreen user interface.

a. Automatic switchover from primary to backup system on high or low temperature

alarm event. When such switchover occurs, touchscreen shall indicate the failed

system and shall inhibit periodic switchovers until the failed system has been

manually acknowledged and reset.

b. Weekly switchover from primary to backup system to ensure equal system wear

and current readiness of both systems. Weekly switchover shall include user

selectable switchover day/time and shall only occur when no system failures are

indicated.

2.5 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

A. The mechanical systems shall include the following major components: condensing unit,

evaporator fan coil, thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer, hot gas and liquid line

solenoid valves, and all required refrigeration piping.

B. The refrigeration system design shall be continuous proportional hot gas bypass in which the

compressor does not cycle to control temperature. At manufacturer’s option, hot gas modulation

may be accomplished by 2-way modulating valve or pulse-width modulation using rapid cycle

solenoid valves with extended stem. Standard refrigeration solenoid valves are not permitted.

C. Refrigeration system shall be sized to accommodate all chamber loads with sufficient excess

capacity to satisfy system recovery tests. For sizing purposes, each system shall be capable of

removing not less than 5 watts of live load per square foot of floor area, in addition to chamber

equipment and lighting.

D. Refrigerant shall be R407c. All rooms on a single project shall use the same refrigerant.

E. Compressor and evaporator shall be sized with matching capacities such that regular defrost

cycles are not required for rooms operating at +4°C or above.

F. Redundant systems. Where indicated, provide each room with two (2) independent refrigeration

systems for 100% redundancy. Each system shall be capable of operating independently to

control chamber temperature under maximum load conditions.

G. Heating Systems:

1. Heaters shall be incoloy sheathed Nichrome wire with a maximum watt density of 23

watts per square inch. Heaters shall be mounted on downstream side of evaporator coil

and shall be positioned so as to prevent accidental contact with the heated surfaces.






2. Provide mechanical limit control to monitor air temperature in the conditioning plenum,

disabling heaters in the event air temperature exceeds preset limits. High limit cutout

shall be factory preset and nonadjustable, with high limit cutout not to exceed 65°C.

Tripped limit control shall be equipped with manual reset button.

H. Dehumidification Systems

1. Rooms designed for operation at or below a 10°C dewpoint shall be equipped with a

desiccant dehumidification system sized to maintain specified chamber conditions.

2. Dehumidifier shall be of the non-cycling sorption type with a single desiccant rotary

structure. The casing will be fabricated as a unitized body with welded aluminum

construction for maximum strength and durability. Suitable access panel shall allow

access for inspection or servicing without disconnecting ducting or electrical wiring.

Airflow balancing dampers to be furnished.

3. Dehumidifier shall be factory assembled, fully automatic, complete with silica gel

HoneyCombe desiccant wheel, reactivation heaters, reactivation energy control system,

roughing filters, motors, fans, non-racheting desiccant drive unit, automatic controller and

all components’ auxiliaries. Reactivation energy modulation shall be stepless solid state

proportioning type. Dehumidifier shall be functionally tested at the manufacturer’s factory

and shipped complete with all components necessary to maintain normal operation.

4. Desiccant shall not channel, cake or fracture due to repeated temperature and moisture

cycling. The materials of construction shall be non-toxic and NFPA 225-ASTM E84

compliant. Full face contact pressure seals shall be provided to separate the process and

reactivation air streams and eliminate detrimental leakage of air or moisture with static

pressure differentials of up to 3″ of water gauge.

5. Desiccant dehumidifier shall be circuited and controlled from chamber control console.

2.6 LIGHTING

A. Lighting output shall be a minimum of 75 foot-candles as measured 40 inches above finished

floor at 22°C.

B. Low temperature electronic ballasts shall be provided for cold rooms operating below 10°C.

C. Lighting systems shall utilize LED lamps. Lamps and ballasts shall be enclosed in UL listed

vapor-proof fixtures surface mounted with no exposed conduit.

D. Provide exterior light switch with pilot light at latch side of entrance door.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical receptacles. Electrical receptacles shall be 115V, 20 amps, NEMA 5-20R, located as

shown on electrical plans.

B. Electrical receptacles shall be foamed in place in wall panel with conduit concealed and stubbed

through the top of the ceiling panel. CER manufacturer shall provide electrical receptacles and

circuit them through the control console.

C. Casework and Shelving. Casework and shelving shall be supplied by the laboratory equipment

supplier. Controlled environment room manufacturer to provide reinforced wall panels for

wall-mounted counters or shelving as shown on plans.

2.8 UTILITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Services. Division 16 shall make final electrical connections for each room:

1. Service to be provided at control console shall be 115/208 VAC, 60 hz, 3 phase, 4 wire

service.






2. Service to be provided at condensing unit shall be 460 VAC, 3 phase, 60 hz, 3 wire

service with disconnect.

B. Ventilation System. Division 15 shall provide conditioned air supply and exhaust to the room at a

rate of 0.5 cfm per square foot for all occupied spaces. CER manufacturer shall provide inlet

and exhaust dampers for final connection by Division 15.

C. Condenser Water. Division 15 to make final condenser water connections to CER watercooled

condensing unit. Water supply lines to be coordinated with condensing unit requirements.

D. Drains. Division 15 to provide floor drain within 10’ of controlled environment room as shown on

plans for condensate drain connections.

E. Fire Suppression. Fire suppression systems to be provide by fire sprinkler contractor.

Penetrations and sprinkler layout to be coordinated with controlled environment room

manufacturer.

1.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Strips and Closer Panels:

1. Trim Strips: Shall be of the same finish as the environmental room exterior to be provided

and installed to fill the area between the building wall and the sides of the environmental

rooms and to fill between adjacent environmental rooms. All dimensions to be verified.

2. Closure Panels: Shall be of the same finish as the environmental room exterior are to be

provided and installed to fill between the building deck and/or structure and the top of the

environmental room. Closure panels to include louvers as required to provide maximum air

interchange for equipment enclosed above environmental room.

PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspection: Installing Contractor shall examine and verify areas of work of other trades for correct

dimensions, properly located electrical and mechanical utilities. Report any unsatisfactory

conditions to the Construction manager and Architect in writing.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: The installer shall conduct the pre-site inspection, install the Environmental Room as

indicated on the drawings. This installation shall include receiving, unloading, inspection, and

unpacking of Environmental Room components, the panel erection, light fixture mounting,

installation of the ceiling plenum, piping, leak testing and start up of the refrigeration system, testing

of complete Environmental Room and the piping of the condensate drains. It is the responsibility

of others to provide electrical wiring, all final hookup of utilities to the Environmental Rooms.

1. Install Environmental Room in accordance with the accepted manufacturer’s standards and

Specifications.

2. Seal or otherwise insure that fastenings to Environmental Rooms do not compromise vapor

barriers or insulation. Seal all service penetrations for piping and sleeves. Seal all

electrical conduit to prevent condensation from accumulating in light fixtures/junction boxes.

3. Insulate refrigeration lines with Amaflex insulation or equal in accordance with ASHRAE

standards.






3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. Operating Temperature: After Environmental Room has reached operating temperature, door

shall be fully opened to 75 Fahrenheit ambient for a period of one full minute, room shall

recover to operating temperature within 5 minutes after closing door.

B. Control Set Point: The Environmental Room shall be designed to operate at temperature and

humidity specified in the Environmental Room Schedule. Control sensitivity is defined as the

temperature measured at the point where the Prefabricated Room temperature control sensing

element is placed, at a given point in time. The control sensitivity is to be 0.5 Centigrade

within specified set point.

C. Temperature Uniformity: The Environmental Rooms are to be designed to provide a temperature

uniformity as specified in the Environmental Room Schedule. Uniformity is to be 0.3F at the

control sensor.

D. Humidity control to be 5% at the control sensor.


A. Acceptance Testing: Acceptance of the Environmental Rooms shall come only after each room

has met the parameters as outlined in the performance section of the Specifications. It is the

responsibility of the Contractor in the presence of a factory trained representative, to verify the

operation of the Environmental Rooms and obtain Owner’s written approval. A copy of this

document must remain with the Owner, with an additional copy sent to the room manufacturer.

The Environmental Rooms operation will then become the Owner’s responsibility and the warranty

period will coincide with acceptance.

3.5 STARTUP & TESTING

A. General Requirements:

1. Provide written startup report indicating, at minimum, date/time of startup, pressure test

duration and start/end pressures, vacuum test results, refrigerant type and volume, and

operating pressures once system has stabilized at setpoint.

2. Controlled environment rooms shall be tested by the manufacturer for proper operation.

Manufacturer shall notify owner a minimum of 7 days in advance to provide owner

opportunity to witness the room tests. Manufacturer shall provide written documentation

of all test results. Written test reports for sustained operation and uniformity testing shall

include: control setpoint, date/time test was initiated, date/time test was completed,

manufacturer model and serial number of test instrument(s), calibration certification for

each test instrument.

3. For any tests not satisfactorily completed, manufacturer shall make appropriate chamber

modifications and repeat the failed test.

B. Refrigerant Piping Test

1. Pressure test: Refrigerant piping shall be pressurized with dry nitrogen gas and shall hold

a pressure of 250 psi for a minimum of 2 hours prior to startup.

2. Vacuum test: Refrigeration systems shall be evacuated to below 500 microns and then

monitored for pressure rise above 500 microns for a period of 20 minutes prior to

charging and startup.

C. Sustained Operation Testing (24 hours, single point)

1. Sustained operation test shall demonstrate consistent control at a single point over a

period of 24 hours. For rooms designed to operate over a range of temperature

conditions, the test shall consist of 24-hour operation at each of the maximum, minimum

and one intermediate point for a total of 72 hours of sustained operation testing.






2. Rooms with humidity control shall record chamber humidity levels to demonstrate

consistent control at a single point over a period of 24 hours. For rooms designed to

operate over a range of humidity conditions, the test shall consist of 24-hour operation at

each of the maximum, minimum and one intermediate point for a total of 72 hours of

sustained operation testing. Minimum humidity test shall coincide with minimum

temperature test, and maximum humidity test shall coincide with maximum temperature

test to ensure limits of humidity system operation.

3. Integrated data logging feature of touchscreen control interface shall be sufficient to

document sustained operation, with data to be printed or downloaded for submittal of test

results.

D. Chamber Uniformity Testing (8 hours, 12 point)

1. Each room shall be temperature mapped with a minimum of ten (10) temperature sensors

evenly distributed on a plane 44” above finished floor, with sensors located a minimum of

12” from walls, counters and shelving obstructions.

2. Test instrument(s) shall have been certified for accuracy by a recognized testing

laboratory within one (1) year prior to testing.

3. Uniformity test shall be conducted for a minimum of eight (8) hours per room.

E. Chamber Recovery Testing (30 second door opening, 3 minute recovery)

1. To demonstrate adequate system capacity for chamber recovery, perform a chamber

recovery test on each chamber at minimum operating temperature.

2. With chamber conditions stabilized, open door to a minimum angle of 120 degrees for a

period of 30 seconds. When 30 second period is complete, close the door and wait for

chamber to recover. Document start time, door open time, door close time, maximum

chamber temperature reached, and system recovery time.

3.6 CLEANING

A. General: Remove protective material from surfaces. Clean interior and exterior or Environmental

Room including components. Remove surplus materials, debris and tools.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. General: Manufacturer’s Representative shall provide a demonstration for designated Owner’s

Representative to inform them of proper Environmental Room operation and maintenance.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. General: Shut off equipment and lock doors to prevent access by unauthorized persons. Verify

in writing that Environmental Room condition is undamaged and acceptable with Construction

Manager. Forward all Environmental Room keys to Construction Manager for final acceptance of

Environmental Rooms.






3.9 ENVIRONMENTAL ROOM SCHEDULE

Room Number: Seed Drying 1053

Exterior Dimensions: 27'-0" x 14'-8" x 12'-0" high

Interior Dimensions: 26'-4" x 14'-0" x 11'-8" high

Temperature Range: 20 to 37.5 degree C

Humidity Range: Non-condensing

Makeup Air (each room): 150 cfm

Refrigerant: R407C

Condensing Unit: Water-cooled mounted above room. 460v 3 phase 60 hz

with disconnect

Control Panel: 115/208 3 phase

Accessories/Options: Thirteen (13) weatherproof receptacles for drying carts (up

to 20 watts per square foot live load).

Room Number: Seed Storage 1050 & 1052

Exterior Dimensions: 39'-0" x 47'-0" x 12'-0" high (total, both rooms)

Interior Dimensions: (2) rooms each 19'-0" x 46'-4" x 11'-8" high (one interior

common wall)

Temperature Range: 0 to 4 degrees C

Humidity Range: 30% R.H.

Makeup Air (each room): 300 cfm

Refrigerant: R407C

Condensing Unit (each room): Water-cooled mounted above room. 460v 3

phase 60 hz with disconnect

Control Panel (each room): 115/208 3 phase

Accessories/Options (each room):

Fully redundant systems including evaporator, condenser and

dehumidification.

Three (3) weatherproof duplex receptacles.



GREENHOUSE & GREENHOUSE RELATED EQUIPMENT 133413 - 1

SECTION 133413 – GREENHOUSE & GREENHOUSE RELATED EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. It is the intent of this portion of the specifications to include the furnishing and erecting of the greenhouse superstructure including all glazing, doors & door hardware, and ventilation as shown on plans and/or hereinafter described such work to be the responsibility of the Greenhouse Manufacturer. Greenhouse installation is the responsibility of the Greenhouse Manufacturer and shall be included with bid on bid day. Material only bids will not be accepted. Bids received after the bid date shall be considered non-responsive and shall not be accepted.

B. It is not the intent of this portion of the specifications to cover concrete, grouting, masonry work, plumbing, electrical work (power and control wiring), utility connections, final cleaning of glazing, nor counter-flashing. This portion shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor or his selected Subcontractors other than the Greenhouse Manufacturer.

C. No concrete/foundation installation shall be made prior to approval of greenhouse drawings. Approved greenhouse drawings shall be used to make all concrete/ foundation installations. Dimensions may vary slightly from contract drawings to accommodate manufacturer's standard, but total area shall not be less than 98% of that shown.

1.2 SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANS

A. These specifications are intended to supplement the drawings and, therefore, it shall not be their purpose to mention any portion of the construction which the drawings are competent to explain and such omissions shall not relieve the Greenhouse Manufacturer from carrying out such portions indicated only on the drawings and should items be required by specifications which are not indicated on the drawings, they shall be supplied and installed by this Contractor.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Concrete floors, grouting of sills and base plates, and concrete stem walls: Division 03 and 04.

2. Plumbing rough-in work and hook-up of greenhouse plumbing systems, and downspouts described in this section: Division 22.

3. Electrical power wiring, environmental control system wiring, lighting, conduit and hook-ups of greenhouse electrical equipment provided under this section: Division 26.


A. The greenhouses shall be erected by the manufacturer or their qualified greenhouse specialty contractor with at least five (5) years of experience in building greenhouses of the type specified, similar in size and complexity.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Greenhouse Manufacturer shall submit electronic sets of approval drawings.

B. Approval submittals shall include structurally engineered stamped drawings for the State of Missouri, a full set of engineering calculations, equipment submittal and a full warranty per Paragraph 3.06 of this specification. Submittals without this warranty will not be reviewed.

C. Approval drawings shall include the following detailed information:

1. Cover Sheet 2. Floor/ Post Plans



3. Post Feet Details 4. Roof Framing Plans 5. Roof Glazing Plans 6. Sidewall Elevations 7. Gable Elevations 8. Partition Elevations 9. Aluminum Truss 10. Foundation Outline & Greenhouse Structural Loads 11. Equipment Plans & Sections with Electrical Loads 12. Bench Layout (Benches to be owner furnished & installed under separate contract) 13. Heating Plan & Details 14. Plant Lighting Plans including Light Rack Plan & Details 15. Double Vent Ridge Section 16. Typical Sidewall Section 17. Roof to Gable Section 18. Misc. Closure Details (greenhouse to head house/building) 19. Door & Door Hardware Schedule

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Drawings and specifications are based on THE TECHLITE HOUSE as manufactured by Rough Brothers, 5513 Vine Street, Cincinnati, Ohio 45217, (1-800-543-7351) or pre- bid approved equal.

1. Manufacturers seeking approval to bid and who have products similar in design and meeting all the requirements of the specifications must submit complete product data, sample of warranty conforming to this specification and specifications along with a list of seven (7) projects of equal size and magnitude that have been successfully completed and operational for a minimum of four (4) years and evidencing not less than ten (10) years of experience in similar work. Name and location of project, name and address of general contractor, name and address of architect shall be provided for each of the references.

2. Only those products received by the architect no later than ten (10) days prior to the bid opening and only those products approved in writing by the architect, prior to the bid opening shall be considered. All specified equipment manufacturers/models here in named shall be provided. If substitute equipment manufacturers/models are to be used, it shall be so indicated at time of bid and bidder shall offer an alternate deduct for the substitution(s) and obtain prior approval from the owner and architect. Any bid from a non-preapproved manufacturer or a bid containing non-preapproved equipment manufacturers/models may not be used or accepted.

2.2 BASIS OF DESIGN

A. The basis of design is based on the specific manufacturers/models specified in this section, any deviation from these named manufacturers/models will affect the performance of the individual greenhouse research zones. If substitute equipment manufacturers/models are approved prior to the bid opening and included in bid, the performance of the individual greenhouse research zones shall be the responsibility of the bidding greenhouse manufacturer.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Structure shall be designed and detailed according to good engineering practice by a structural engineer licensed in the State of Missouri. Structural engineering shall be project and location specific. All primary framing shall be 6005 or 6061-T6 and 6063-T6 alloys. All



aluminum flashing shall be 3003-H14 alloy. Framing shall consist of aluminum trusses on 12'-0" centers spanning the full width of the structure with a 6/12 roof pitch. Aluminum shall be mill finish with appropriate heat treatment. No castings, either of aluminum or aluminum alloy, shall be permitted for joining structural members at joints subject to stress in which tensile strength is a factor.

B. Sidewall columns shall be attached to top of kneewall with adhesive set 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. Drilling for anchors and setting of plated anchor bolts to be by the Greenhouse Manufacturer.

C. Structural connections shall be made with galvanized steel bolts. All bolts 1/4” diameter up to ½” diameter shall be A307. All bolts ½” diameter or larger shall be Grade 5. Welded connections will not be accepted.

2.4 STANDARD DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Building Code: 2015 IBC (with Amendments)

B. In addition to the above, roof bars shall be required to carry a 100 lb. concentrated load at the center of any span.

C. Structure shall be designed in accordance with current Aluminum Association "Specifications for Aluminum Structures". The maximum allowable deflection shall be L/120 of the span. Structure shall include adequate bracing for the lateral support of structural members and framing, and for stability of the structure for the resistance to wind forces. Bottom chord members as well as other truss members shall be adequate to resist compressive loads produced by horizontal wind loads and roof uplift produced by wind.

2.5 EXPANSION CONTROL

A. Suitable expansion joints shall be provided in all longitudinal members to take care of the longitudinal expansion in the aluminum. No longitudinal members shall exceed 24 0". All members shall be so joined as to require each joint to handle the expansion in the individual member and to prevent an accumulation of expansion in several members in one direction.

2.6 ALUMINUM FRAME

A. Truss members and connection plates shall be aluminum. Welded connections will not be accepted. Special care shall be taken in the fabrication of this aluminum work, and all tolerances shall be held to an absolute minimum in order to secure proper fit of the aluminum members specified.

B. Aluminum columns shall be furnished and placed through the length of the greenhouse and across all partitions and gables as required. Columns shall be factory punched, or drilled to attach required aluminum members.

C. Trusses shall be connected to the sidewall columns by an aluminum plate so designed as to be bolted to the web of the column with all bolts in shear. No joint shall be allowed, either of combined extrusions or a casting that shall be fastened to the flange of the column thereby placing fasteners in tension or twist.

D. Aluminum gutter support stub posts and beams shall be provided in the corridors and be bolted to flanges of the main gutter columns. These members could be designed and used for utility support of piping and conduit running down the corridor.

E. Aluminum rafters shall be furnished and placed in the roof of the greenhouse, extending from the gutter to the ridge. Each pair of rafters shall be connected together at the ridge by means of aluminum plates.



F. Aluminum purlins in the roof, of the size required shall be furnished and connected to supporting members with a minimum of two galvanized steel into each member. Purlins shall be prefabricated before shipment for the attachment of glazing bars and purlin clips.

G. Provide all other mill-finished aluminum structural components; such as bracing, clips, and fasteners not mentioned above but required to complete the framework of the greenhouse.

2.7 GUTTER

A. An extruded aluminum gutter, 7 ½" wide x 2 3/4" deep, with extruded drip gutter and internal downspout connections shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. This member shall have a flange to receive glazing bars and shall be provided with weep holes to carry condensation collected from the underside of the roof to the drip gutter. Gutter to include safety foot treads as a safety factor. Gutters without integral extruded safety tread shall not be accepted.

B. Connections for gutter downspouts shall be provided where indicated on drawings. Final connection and downspout material covered in other section.

2.8 RIDGE

A. An extruded aluminum ridge shall be furnished and placed at the peak of the structure. Ridge shall be provided with continuous socket hinge to receive ridge vents or fixed roof glazing.

2.9 GABLES

A. Techlite gables with fixed gables from sill to end rafter shall be constructed in a similar manner to the roof and sides using extruded aluminum shapes.

2.10 GABLE ENDRAFTER

A. Specially extruded gable and corner trim shall be provided to receive roof glazing bar, vertical side and gable glazing and glazing bars. The gable and corner trim shall be neatly mitered and spliced at the ridge and at the eave or gutter to provide a smooth detail at this point. These shall be securely fastened to the structural members, forming the gable end.

2.11 WALL AND VENT SILLS

A. Extruded aluminum sills shall be provided where required. Sills shall be capable of receiving side vents or fixed glazing. Sill corners shall be shop welded.

2.12 ROOF & EXTERIOR WALL GLAZING BARS

A. Extruded aluminum glazing bars shall be installed on 48" centers and properly attached to structure. Condensation gutters to conduct primary condensation shall extend the full length of the glazing bars. Roof, exterior sidewall and gable glazing bars to include an EPDM gasketed cap incorporating a rigid P.V.C. thermal break. Cap shall be designed to exert a uniform, but not excessive pressure on the entire length of the glazing panel. Caps shall be held in place with 5/8" x #8 hex head stainless steel screws placed on 9" centers.

B. An extruded aluminum gutter terminator base and cap shall be installed where the 16mm acrylic roof panel terminates at the aluminum gutter. The gutter terminator base and cap shall be integral to the aluminum gutter and shall run as one piece between each rafter. The gutter terminator cap shall be made to accept a EPDM gasket and a rigid P.V.C. thermal break. Cap shall be designed to exert a uniform, but not excessive pressure across the entire width of the 16mm acrylic glazing panel. Caps shall be held in place with 5/8" x #8 hex head stainless steel screws placed on 9" centers. The use of “slip-on” end panel terminators and wet seal/caulk sealing will not be accepted.



2.13 INTERIOR PARTITION WALLS

A. Extruded aluminum H-splice shall be installed to receive 8 mm acrylic on 48” centers with an aluminum base angle.

2.14 KNEEWALL SILL FLASHING

A. Aluminum sill flashing shall be placed on the outside of the perimeter kneewall. Sill flashing shall be placed under the glazing sill member and to the outside of the greenhouse columns, covering the top of the exposed kneewall including any insulation and/or face veneer, if present. Aluminum sill flashing shall extend no less than 2” down the vertical face of the kneewall. Sill flashing at kneewalls and connection to adjacent structures shall be a minimum 1/16” thick. All sill corner flashing shall be shop welded. All sill flashing and end flashing conditions at door openings shall be shop welded closures matching the profile of the sill flashing. All sill flashing to be laid end to end with a .032 x4” long splice cap matching the profile of the sill flashing. Splice cap to be set in sealant and held in place with pop-rivets. Lapped sill flashing at joints is not acceptable.

PART 3 - GREENHOUSE RELATED EQUIPMENT

3.1 ROOF VENTS

A. Automatic 48" ridge vents with a continuous socket hinge shall be furnished and arranged to open out. Vents for any given compartment, when assembled and installed, shall be continuous from one end to the other. Ridge vents shall be made up of a top rail, bottom rail and mullions of extruded aluminum and bolted together in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

B. All vents shall have provision made at the hinge point to prevent creeping of the vents.

3.2 GABLE VENTS

A. Automatic 48" gablewall vents with continuous socket hinge shall be furnished and arranged to open out as shown on the drawings. Vents for the corridor, when assembled and installed, shall be continuous from one end to the other. Refer to drawings for sections. Gable vent shall be made up of a top rail, bottom rail and mullions of extruded aluminum and bolted together in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. All vents shall have provision made at the hinge point to prevent creeping of the vents.

3.3 VENT OPERATORS

A. All vents shall be operated with steel rack arms with zinc pinions.

B. Provide 14 gage 1.315" diameter galvanized drive shaft with aluminum couplings.

C. Aluminum shaft hangers with DELRIN bushings shall be provided to support roof and side vent drive shaft.

D. Rack & pinion arms with steel rack, zinc pinion gear and extruded aluminum housing assembly to keep rack and pinions in proper mesh and alignment shall be provided. Racks attach to bottom rail of vents with aluminum clips and stainless steel cotter pins. No less than two sets of rack and pinion arms shall be provided for each bay per run of vents.

3.4 VENT MACHINES

A. Lock EWA Series vent machines shall be used to operate the motorized ridge and sidewall. Vent machines to have line voltage limits.



3.5 MOTORIZED SHUTTERS

A. Motorized shutters shall be located at the end of the corridors at locations shown on drawings. Size of shutter per equipment schedule per drawings.

1. Ultra-low leakage control damper where blades are completely contained within the frame allowing the damper to be directly mounted with no blade interference as manufactured by Greenheck. a. Blade Action: Opposed b. Frame Type: Channel c. Material: Aluminum d. Frame Thickness (in.): 0.125 e. Actuators: Belimo 2-position 24 VAC with NEMA enclosure 4X and auxiliary switch

3.6 SCREENS

A. Screens shall be provided at all vent openings and at motorized shutters in at the ends of the corridors at locations shown on the drawings.

B. Corridor roof vents: 1. Screens shall be 1 mm x 1.5 mm accordion fabric style mesh as manufactured by

HollandGaas. 2. Screen framing shall consist of an extruded aluminum accordion vent screen cap with

rubber gasket and flat accordion bottom profile. 3. Accordion screen rope guide shall be secured to the bottom of the double ridge vent. 4. End bar cap closure shall be placed at the ends of each vent run.

C. Greenhouse zone roof, corridor gable wall vents and at motorized shutters, at locations shown in drawings:

1. Screen rails shall be 5/16" x 7/8" mill finish extruded aluminum with a groove to receive a vinyl insert to hold 16 x 18 aluminum mesh in place.

2. Screen frames shall be assembled with die cast aluminum corners and designed to allow for re-screening of units in the field.

3. Brush seals shall be provided at ends of screen frames where vent operator arms penetrate.

3.7 GLAZING

A. Glazing panels shall be clear extruded acrylic double skinned panels, as manufactured by Evonik. Panels shall be furnished in continuous sections in each slope of the roof and in sidewall and gable areas. Full 47 1/4" wide panels to be used wherever possible.

1. For the roof and exterior walls a. 16 mm ACRYLITE Alltop High Impact 16/64 Double Skin Acrylic Sheet

2. For all the interior sidewall and gable partitions a. 8 mm ACRYLITE Resist High Impact 8/16 Double Skin Acrylic Sheet

B. Greenhouse manufacturer must be an authorized distributor and installer of Evonik products.

3.8 EXHAUST FANS

A. Exhaust fans shall be heavy-duty construction, consisting of a cast aluminum propeller having three (3) or more Macheta® tip blades, and a formed fiberglass housing and exhaust cone, both having a smooth, gel coat exterior surface.

B. Fans shall use the Munters Drive direct drive motor system, consisting of the EC motor and motor drive developed exclusively by Munters. Fans shall be protected against rust and corrosion with stainless steel hardware, and aluminum struts. Fans shall be variable speed as scheduled on the drawings.



C. Fans used in this specification shall be performance certified by an independent testing facility such as BESS Labs (University of Illinois) and shall list the appropriate test number on the fan.

D. Motorized, airfoil style shutters with aluminum blades shall be provided as part of each exhaust fan. Shutter motor kits to include drive motor, crank arm, pull chain, return spring and hardware.

E. Fans, wall housings, OSHA inlet and outlet guards, shutters and shutter motor kits shall be as manufactured and provided by Aerotech, A Munters Company (Mason, MI).

3.9 EVAPORATIVE COOLING SYSTEM

A. The wet pad system shall consist of Munters CELdek® evaporative cooling pad specially designed with a cross fluted configuration of cellulose paper impregnated with insoluble anti-rot salts and stiffening agent, MI-T-edg, on both sides. The water distributor shall consist of extruded aluminum sections and water deflectors with a rigid, 1½” PVC pipe having metered outlet holes. The collection trough and water deflectors shall be self-contained PVC. PVC end panels shall enclose the pads at the ends of all systems. Cooling system shall be CT Evaporative cooling system as manufactured by Aerotech, A Munters Company, (Mason, MI).

B. Furnish and install standard plumbing package which includes float valve, strainer, union, ball valve and piping between pump and water distributor, bleed off valve and tank overflow as manufactured by Aerotech, A Munters Company.

C. A (submersible) pump of heavy duty construction featuring high volume at relatively low head pressure shall be provided for each compartment and installed with a union in the discharge line for easy servicing. The pump shall be supplied by Aerotech, A Munters Company.

D. The self-contained PVC system shall include a containment sump utilizing a 15” PVC tank connected to the collection trough as manufactured by Aerotech, A Munters Company.

E. Inlet shutters at the evaporative cooling pad system shall be Aerotech extruded aluminum blade style, operated by Belimo spring return damper actuator, 24-240vac. Shutter actuators shall be located/mounted external to and above the evaporative cooling pad system to avoid contact with cooling system water.

F. Furnish and install aluminum extruded 2 x 4 tube stringers and 0.032" aluminum flashing to prevent air leaks around cooling system. Cooling system support framing shall be installed per Munters’ installation manual.

G. Furnish and install 1” pvc pipe from bleed off valve to floor drain in each zone, floor drain by others.

H. Furnish and install 1” pvc pipe from the tank overflow to floor drain in each zone, drain by others.

I. Furnish and install at each flush out valve, the following: 1. 1 ½” PVC coupling SXS 2. 1 ½” x 1 ½” PVC bushing SPGxFPT 3. ¾” x ½” brass adaptor MHTxMIP LF 4. ¾” x brass cap FHT LF

3.10 HEATING

A. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1. Design requirements: 2. Inside Temperature: 65 °F



3. Outside Temperature: 0 °F 4. Temperature Difference: 65 °F 5. Wind: 15 MPH 6. System design: Hot water heating system to provide 100% of greenhouse system

heating load.

B. General Requirements: The heating system for the greenhouse shall be a Delta T Solutions Hot Water Heating System. The system is designed under the following conditions:

1. Hot Water Supply: 180 °F 2. Hot Water Return: 140 °F 3. Temperature Differential: 40 °F 4. Relief Valve Pressure: 60 psi 5. Operating Pressure: 12 psi

C. General System Description:

1. Hot water heating system with a variable flow supplied to the system based on the quantity zones that have a heating demand. The hot water shall flow through radiating materials to control heat to the desired temperature in each zone.

2. The system shall consist of the following heating zones that will be controlled using the following components to maintain the desired zone temperatures:

a. Range A – (12) Growing zones and (1) Common Corridor

b. Ranges B & C – (6) Growing zones and (1) Common Corridor Each

D. Heating Source: The heat source with pumps that will be supplying the hot water to the radiating materials shall be supplied by others, with the required flow being supplied as per the design drawing.

1. Zone Control: Two way valve zone control shall be able to supply water to the zone or pass water flow from the main system pump while maintaining a constant designed flow rate using an automatic flow control and three-way control valve in each corridor. Control of the actuated valve shall be a 24v-3 wire floating control from a:

a. Control Valves: Two-way and three-way control valves shall be manufactured by Honeywell, Belimo or approved equal. Valve actuator shall be removable and be connected to 24V power to open and power to close control. Valve shall be bronze construction up to 2.0” with removable internal parts without removing the valve from the piping, EPMD O-ring and stainless steel stem. Valves provided by and installed by greenhouse manufacturer.

b. Automatic flow controls shall be manufactured by AutoFlow factory set to automatically limit the flow within 5% of specified amount. Internal wear surfaces of the valve cartridge are nickel and stainless steel with stainless steel spring.

2. Radiation shall supply total heat loss based on the design criteria using the following materials:

a. Radiation Fin Tube: Radiating materials shall be the Delta-T Fin SF125 aluminum finned pipe installed around the perimeter low on the wall or under the gutter, using water temperatures up to 230F and will consist of the following components:

b. 1.25” schedule 40 aluminum pipe with 3.25” x 3.25” x 0.025” aluminum fins at 48 fin/ft or 24 fins/ft based on design requirements. Pipe shall have each end grooved to accept the grooved coupling provided.

c. Coupling shall be grooved style with aluminum casting and high temperature gasket rated for -60F to 230F. Coupling and external grooved fin system shall absorb expansion from heated aluminum. Pressure ratings of 125 psi at 230F.

d. Elbows shall be sch 40 aluminum sweeps with grooved connections. e. Expanded metal mesh fin tube covers to be provided over the Fin Tube heating

system in compartments with “low” perimeter fin position.



f. All aluminum slide brackets shall be used on all fin when attached to side walls. g. Piping in the greenhouse compartments shall be schedule 40 aluminum pipe and

shall be installed with grooved coupling technology. All piping that is exposed and will have casual contact shall be insulated with 1.0 inch fiberglass insulation and be covered with aluminum cover per drawing.

h. All main piping in the corridors feeding the zones shall be schedule 40 steel piping using grooved connections to all fittings.

i. All piping shall be designed with expansion joints where required.

3. All straight piping shall be insulated with 1 inch fiberglass insulation and covered with aluminum cover.

4. All piping shall be labeled with directional arrows and description. 5. All controls valves shall be tags with metal tags and chain. 6. All drain valves will be provided with caps attached with chain. 7. All necessary elbows, nipples, drain plugs, air bleeders, expansion joints, to complete the

system should be included in the system. 8. All pipes shall be seismically braced, coordinate with greenhouse manufacturer for piping

support in corridors. 9. System control - Environmental Controller will control the zone actuators based on air

temperature inside each compartment and corridor. 10. Wells for the HWS & HWR sensors shall be provided and installed in the greenhouse

corridors and thermometers shall be provided and installed in the greenhouse zones. HWS and HWR temperature probe sensors shall be provided by greenhouse control system supplier and installation shall be greenhouse radiant fin tube heating installation crew. Sensors shall be located in the corridor piping where this system starts for only monitoring of the HWS & HWR temperatures. Thermometers shall be located in each greenhouse zone at both the supply and return lines for visual monitoring only. Control wiring and wiring connections by electrical contractor.

11. Engineering and Design for the heating system shall meet uniform mechanical code. All drawings shall be blue lined drawings on standard D size, Stamped by mechanical engineer.

12. Installation: Full installation of the above system will be responsibility of the greenhouse contractor. The installation shall be done with a crew experienced for not less than 3 years of installing hot water heating systems.

13. Installation shall include start up and testing of systems.

3.11 HORIZONTAL AIR FLOW FANS

A. Air distribution system in the 16’-0” tall greenhouses shall be 12" diameter horizontal air flow fans, VK12, as manufactured and provided by Schaefer, Inc. Refer to drawings for locations and quantities. Assembled unit to include totally enclosed fan cooled motor (115V, 1/10 H.P., 1725 RPM), polyvinyl coated guard, aluminum 3 wind fan blade, 1342 CFM rating and aluminum mounting bracket for hanging.

3.12 PADDLE FANS

A. Air distribution system in the 25’-0” tall greenhouses shall be 54" diameter Agrifan, 190C-7, as manufactured and provided by Northwest Envirofan. Refer to drawings for locations and quantities. Assembled unit to include thermo protected motor (120V, 0.64 Amps, 350 RPM), cast iron motor housing, aluminum blades, 34,500 CFM rating with a 30” down rod.

B. Provide and install angle mounting brackets for each paddle fan.

C. Paddle fan speed control shall be a manual solid state speed control to be mounted in the greenhouse zone, 100F (120V, 2.5 Amps, 300W), as manufactured and provided by Northwest Envirofan. Control wiring by electrical contractor.



3.13 RETRACTABLE SHADE/HEAT RETENTION CURTAIN SYSTEM

A. GENERAL

1. Independently motorized Shading, Cooling and Heat Retention Curtain System(s) designed for size as shown on the drawings as manufactured by Rough Brothers, Inc.

2. Curtains are to travel simultaneously from truss to truss and have a peaked or "roofline" profile with a flat top.

3. Support lines with clear, low friction, polyester lines spaced 16” O.C. 4. Anti-billowing lines of clear polyester on 32” centers are to be used to contain curtain

fabric. 5. System to include extruded aluminum seal angles at each truss location designed to

accept rubber seals for use in photoperiod (black-out) systems and adjustable clips to secure support and anti-billowing lines to the seal angle while maintaining straight lines down the length of the greenhouse.

6. Shade/Heat retention fabric shall be:

a. Phormitex 55B Polyester & Aluminum 55% shade factor 55%energy savings b. FF/FR Trevira CS Gray/White 60% shade factor 50% energy savings

B. MOTORS AND CONTROLS

a. System(s) to be independently operated by one motor. b. Motor is to be U.L. or CSA approved. c. Primary and backup limit switches for each travel direction to be integrally mounted

into the motor. External limit switches are not acceptable. d. Motor to be controlled by greenhouse environmental control system.

2. CABLE DRIVE SYSTEM

a. Drive cable to be a 3/32” diameter 7 x 19 stainless steel. b. Drive cables are to be of a continuous length without any splices. c. Curtain system to be cable driven using composite drums (two drums per drive

cable) and return pulleys. No metal drums or bare drive shaft cable wrapping will be allowed. Push-Pull (rack & pinion) systems are not an acceptable substitution.

3. SYSTEM HARDWARE

a. All rotating components, i.e. bearing brackets and pulleys are to utilize pre-greased double sealed ball bearings.

b. All hardware is to be corrosion protected by either galvanizing or plating.

4. SYSTEM SEALING

a. Proper sealing of the curtain system at the trusses is to be accomplished using fixed fabric skirts as energy seals.

b. Fixed fabric panels are to be wrapped and stapled around a 1x7 coated cable. Upper wrapped wire of sidewall seal to be capped with a smooth plastic wire guard designed to reduce wear between the above Shade/Heat retention Curtain and the Seal Fabric. Wire guard to travel the length of the greenhouse.

c. All curtains to come precut with ends serged to prevent any unraveling of the material.

3.14 SUPPLEMENTAL PLANT GROWTH LIGHTING

A. SINGLE ENDED – ELECTRONIC HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM (HPS) & METAL HALIDE (MH) FIXTURES

1. Refer to drawings for quantities and locations of HPS and MH light fixtures.

B. BALLAST:



1. BALLAST HOUSING AND COMPONENTS:

a. The ballast housing will comprise of a cast or extruded aluminum body that is powder coated to protect against the elements of a greenhouse environment.

b. Internal components will consist of electronic circuitry designed to start both high pressure sodium and metal halide single-ended lamps that are specified by the manufacturer. The circuitry will be designed with “safety shut-offs” to protect the ballast against some common issues such as short circuits, high and low voltage, end of lamp life, or lamp faults.

c. The ballast shall have a diagnostic LED indicator that will identify possible issues when the ballast ceases operation.

2. WATTAGE

a. The wattage of the ballast is designed for 1000 watt single-ended lamps.

3. VOLTAGE

a. The voltage of the ballast is designed for 277 volt power.

4. POWER CORD:

a. The ballast shall come with an installed 8’ power cord with a locking 277 volt (L7-15P) plug.

5. HANGING HARDWARE:

a. The ballast shall come with a C-bracket hanging bar that attaches to the ballast.

6. CERTIFICATIONS: The ballast shall be UL/CSA approved and designed to withstand normal greenhouse operating conditions.

C. REFLECTOR:

1. DESIGN: The GLX I reflector shall be made of aluminum with a specular to consist of 95% MIRO reflective material. It shall be designed to handle a protective glass lens if desired. The reflector shall be rated at a minimum of 90% total luminaire efficiency.

2. SOCKET AND CHAMBER: An E39 socket and attachment chamber shall be included on the reflector that will allow the reflector to be attached to the ballast for an attached luminaire or removed to allow for remote operation.

3. REMOTE HANGING HARDWARE: For remote applications, (2) hanging hooks (LGHOOK) shall be included with the reflectors.

D. LENS for MH fixtures only:

1. A tempered glass protective lens shall accompany the reflector that is designed to fit the reflector.

E. BULB:

1. High pressure sodium lamp

a. Shall be a single-ended high pressure sodium lamp. The lamp shall be designed to operate with a 1000 watt ballast with a minimum rating of 130,000 initial lumens and a 24,000-hour rated life.

2. Metal halide lamp

a. Shall be a single-ended metal halide lamp. The lamp shall be designed to operate with a 1000 watt ballast with a minimum rating of 100,000 initial lumens and a 9,000-hour rated life.

F. ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES:



1. REMOTE CORD: For remote applications, a 15’ internal extension cord (CSXCORD) shall be included with the proper male (BAREM) and female (BAREF) connectors that are compatible to connect the ballast and the reflector.

G. Refer to drawings for quantities and locations of HPS and MH lights and where remote fixtures are required.

H. Approved manufacturers: Par Source and Gavita

3.15 OVERHEAD FIXED LIGHTING SUPPORT SYSTEM

A. Refer to drawings for fixed galvanized steel support rack.

B. Framing must be fully coordinated with the greenhouse structure and shall take advantage of the structural components for support and anchor.

C. System must not interfere with other greenhouse systems such as the following:

1. Shading system: located above the underside of the truss 2. HAF fans: suspended from under the trusses

3.16 MOUNTING OF LIGHT FIXTURES

A. The mounting of the fixtures will vary depending on the fixed or operable light rack system. 1) For the fixed rack systems, each ballast shall be mounted with a bracket to

the fixed rack and the reflector shall be supported by a chain to allow the light reflector to be manually lowered so that the bottom of the fixture is a maximum of 7’-0” AFF. Refer to drawings.

2) For the operable light rack system, each light shall be mounted with bracket clips to operable rack system. Refer to drawings.

3.17 OPERABLE LIGHT RACK SYSTEM

A. Provide manually operable light rack systems where indicated on drawings.

B. Each operable light rack shall support two (2) rows of three (3) light fixtures as shown on drawings.

C. Framing must be fully coordinated with the greenhouse structure and shall take advantage of the structural components for support and anchor.

D. Maximum distance from finished floor to bottom of light fixture shall be at 7’-0” above finished floor.

E. Cable drum shall be using composite drums (two drums per drive cable). No metal drums or bare drive shaft cable wrapping will be allowed. Cables shall be stainless steel aircraft type, 1/8 in min diameter.

F. System must not interfere with other greenhouse systems such as the following:

1. Shading system: located above the underside of the truss 2. HAF fans: suspended from under the trusses

G. Framing, support systems, anti-swing struts and accessories must be galvanized steel or aluminum. Frame must be coordinated with sliding brackets supporting light fixtures.

H. System to accept HID fixtures as described above.

I. For the 16’ tall greenhouses, manual drive system shall include one (1) Gear Crank (65-GC40:1-S) with 40:1 gear box per (6) lights, with aluminum side plates & stationary mounting brackets, with two (2) Boston Gear 65-GCRA1:A-S 1:1 stationary (right angle) gear crank located at each light rack support with drill crank 96” long (DC96) which shall be used in conjunction with a battery operated drill. Drill shall be provided by owner.



J. For the 25’ tall greenhouses, the manual drive system shall include one (1) Gear Crank (65-GC40:1-S) with 40:1 gear box per (6) lights, with aluminum side plates & stationary mounting brackets, mounted at a height that is easily accessible to the drill crank. The drill crank (DC96) shall be 96” long which shall be used in conjunction with a battery operated drill. Each system shall include three (3) Boston Gear 65-GCRA1:A-S 1:1 stationary (right angle) gear crank located in the center and at each light rack support. Drill shall be provided by owner.

3.18 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Provide and mount environmental control panels per drawings.

1. Complete low voltage operation (24 VAC) 2. The system shall be capable of controlling a greenhouse range with multiple zones. 3. The system shall provide data collecting, processing and storing for each greenhouse

zone. 4. The system shall consider the greenhouse control parameters to determine the

appropriate operating conditions and the sequence of operation of the different greenhouse equipment and systems to best maintain the desired set points.

5. The system shall allow for variable set points as a function of the control parameters. 6. Each controlled greenhouse zone shall operate independently. 7. User shall manually access control of set points and equipment settings for the

greenhouse equipment in each greenhouse zone via the control panel. 8. User shall be able to monitor the greenhouse zone environments directly from the control

panel. 9. The system shall have the capacity to allow remote control for all set points, differentials

and data logging.

B. Control and power wiring and conduit and final wiring connections by electrical contractor.

C. Provide Contactor Panel per drawings and electrical contractor shall mount the panel.

1. UL listed 508A contactor panel in a NEMA rated enclosure.

2. Input/Output Module

a. Power is low voltage. b. Connection to control panel shall use a CAT-5E cable to a router/switch, supplied

and installed by electrical contractor. c. Minimum two communication ports supporting RS-485 with MODBUS

communication protocol with lightning protection.

3. Inputs:

a. Minimum eight (8) analog input channels with 12-bit resolution and overvoltage protection.

b. Minimum one (1) isolated digital input channel.

4. Outputs:

a. Minimum twelve (12) output channels capable of providing 24VAC at 120mA for relay activation.

b. Minimum one (1) dedicated alarm relay to signal alarm condition. c. Minimum two (2) 0-10VDC analog output channels capable of sourcing 100mA. d. Settings for the I/O Module are stored on non-volatile EEPROM memory. e. Real Time Clock for keeping accurate time and date. f. Indicating lights for each power source and network activity. g. Minimum twelve (12) DPDT relays for controlling equipment per I/O module. h. Override switches for easy override control for each output relay. i. Contactors as required per greenhouse systems/ equipment.



j. Internally, inside of front panel mounted vent and shade motor interface control (reversing relays).

k. All required load contactors, contact relays, and dry set of contacts for owner connected low/high temperature alarm system.

5. Control and power wiring and conduit by electrical contractor.

D. Refer to Greenhouse Equipment Plan drawing for the list of equipment and systems to be controlled in the greenhouse corridors and zones.

E. Provide indoor temperature and relative humidity sensor for the zone with control wiring. Installation of the sensor, control wiring and wiring connections are by electrical contractor.

F. Provide a PAR light sensor for each greenhouse zone with control wiring. The sensor shall be mounted above the shade fabric. Installation of the sensor, control wiring and wiring connections are by electrical contractor.

G. Provide HWS and HWR temperature probe sensors with control wiring for each range in the corridor for water temperature monitoring only. Installation of the HW temperature probes shall by radiant fin tube heating installation crew and control wiring and wiring connections by electrical contractor.

H. Provide and mount an outside weather station with control wiring. Weather station to monitor wind direction/speed, temperature, precipitation, and solar connect to the environmental control system for vent override and heating control and weather station control panel. Installation of control wiring and wiring connections by electrical contractor.

I. Provide and mount an alarm manager. Dedicated analog phone line (dry line) and ethernet cable to be provided and installed by respective trade. Control wiring and wiring connections by electrical contractor.

J. Provide and install environmental control system software program complete with custom screen settings for all the controlled zones. Accessible remotely from a PC to monitor entire greenhouse operations and generates color graphs or spreadsheets of the sensor readings and equipment positions. The system software program is to work with Microsoft Windows® 8 or newer. Greenhouse manufacturer not responsible for and connection to internet network.

K. Electrical contractor to mount provided greenhouse environmental control panels per drawings. Control panel shall be located in HH corridor outside the double doors of each range as shown on the drawings.

L. Testing and Owner Training: One two (2) consecutive days on-site for testing and owner training by environmental controls manufacturer

M. Be UL approved.

N. Environmental control system shall be Seed by Wadsworth Control Systems.

O. Line voltage, low voltage wiring, conduit and all wiring connections by Electrical Contractor.

P. NOTE: In addition to the electrical line voltage equipment wiring requirements, low voltage conduits and wiring will also be required for a complete operational greenhouse system. This work and the associated materials are not performed or provided by Rough Brothers. This work would include, but not be limited to:

1. Motors have line voltage limits internally. 2. All hot water valves. 3. All sensor conduits, indoors and outdoors including the mounting of the actual sensors. 4. All interconnection control cable shown on the environmental control drawings. 5. Any added low voltage equipment such as shutters, starter lines, etc. not mentioned

here.



Q. Provide pre-wired NEMA 4 Greenhouse Control Panel (GCP) cabinet for low voltage control of required greenhouse equipment such as sensors, valves, vents and control switches (on/off/manual) for equipment as required by the greenhouse manufacturer. The GCP cabinet shall:

1. Have a NEMA 4 cabinet with locking capability. 2. Be 508A UL approved. 3. Contain only low voltage wiring. 4. Installation, wiring connections and conduit by Electrical Contractor.

R. Provide pre-wired fan cooled Mechanical Panel (MP) cabinet for control of required greenhouse equipment such as fans, pumps and lighting. The MP cabinet shall:

1. Have a cabinet with locking capability. 2. Have reversing contactors for control of roof vents, side vents and shade motors

protected with circuit breakers sized for each motor. 3. Have contactors for control of exhaust fans, pad pump, HAF fans and heat pumps. 4. Provide contactors for quantity of lights as specified by greenhouse manufacturer.

Lighting fixtures shall be 1000 Watt using 277VAC 1-pole 20Amp circuits. 5. Be 508A UL approved. 6. Installation, wiring connections and conduit by Electrical Contractor

S. Provide pre-wired NEMA 4 Corridor Control Panel (CCP) cabinet for low voltage control of required greenhouse equipment which resides in the corridor such as vents as required by the greenhouse manufacturer. The CCP cabinet shall:

1. Have a NEMA 4 cabinet with locking capability. 2. Be 508A UL approved. 3. Contain only low voltage wiring. 4. Installation, wiring connections and conduit by Electrical Contractor.

T. Provide pre-wired NEMA 4 Corridor Mechanical Panel (CMP) cabinet for control of required greenhouse equipment such as Vents and HAF fans which reside in the corridor. The CMP cabinet shall:

1. Have a cabinet with locking capability. 2. Have reversing contactors for control of gable vents protected with circuit breakers sized

for each motor as needed. 3. Have contactors for control of HAF fans. 4. Be 508A UL approved. 5. Installation, wiring connections and conduit by Electrical Contractor.

U. Greenhouse Control Panels and Mechanical Panels may serve multiple zones, refer to greenhouse control system drawings for mounting locations.

3.19 DOORS AND DOOR HARDWARE

A. DOORS

1. Single doors shall be half panel clear anodized with 1 3/4" x 5" extruded tube rails, 4" extruded aluminum tube frame with wool pile seals. Refer to drawings for door sizes and locations.

2. Upper panel shall be glazed with 1/4" clear safety glazing and lower panel shall be an aluminum faced panel.

3. Horizontal rail shall be located at midpoint of door height. All rails and frame shall have a .125" minimum wall thickness.

4. 10” door bottom 5. 10” aluminum kick plate

B. DOOR HARDWARE



1. Hinges: (1 ½ pr.) Hager 4 ½" x 4 ½" stainless steel with non-removable pins 2. Lock Sets:

a. Interior Greenhouse Doors, 9K37R 14D 626 BE (Stanley Security Solutions Inc) lever handle cylindrical type and hall accept Best 7 pin SFIC cores, keyed by others.

b. Exterior Greenhouse Doors, 9K30Y 14D 626 BE (Stanley Security Solutions Inc) exit lever handle cylindrical type and hall accept Best 7 pin SFIC cores, keyed by others.

3. LCN 4040XP closer 4. Hager door sweep 5. Hager aluminum threshold (only for the exterior doors)

PART 4 - EXECUTION

4.1 INSTALLATION

A. Drilling and setting of anchor bolts is to be by Greenhouse Manufacturer.

B. Install entire system and all components in strict accord with Greenhouse Manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Greenhouse Manufacturer is responsible for all unloading of greenhouse materials, systems, equipment and providing for any lift or installation required equipment.

D. Environmental Control System Installation: 1. The greenhouse environmental controls supplier shall be responsible for supplying the

greenhouse environmental control panel(s), communication wire and sensor wire. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for installing the control panel(s), communication wire and sensor wire and wiring the sensors to the computerized control panels.

2. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for the final connections for the control and sensor wiring in the computerized control panels.

3. The electrical contractor shall furnish and install all associated conduits, power wiring, control wiring from the contactor panel to the control panel, and to a computer provided by others, from computer to greenhouse control panel, including any/all conduit for power wiring, sensor and communication wires, low voltage control wiring, as required.

4. The electrical contractor will be responsible for the load wiring and load terminations in the contactor panel, as well as limit switch wiring to the operable vent(s) and or shade/heat retention curtain system(s).

4.2 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

A. Separate aluminum from cementitious material with polyurethene or asphaltic coating.

4.3 GROUTING

A. After the Greenhouse Manufacturer has placed the wall sills, the Masonry Contractor shall provide the necessary materials and labor to grout between the wall and the sill to eliminate any discrepancies between the two and produce a finished joint, if required.

4.4 FLASHING

A. All counter-flashing shall be furnished and placed by the sheet metal contractor. Drawings establishing flashing line shall be furnished by the Greenhouse Manufacturer. All flashing and counter-flashing shall be minimum 1/16” aluminum.

4.5 INSTRUCTION

A. Greenhouse Manufacturer’s project manager shall be certified for having completed an OSHA Construction Safety Training Course, ten (10) hour minimum. Greenhouse



Manufacturer shall provide to the jobsite one (1) complete “job-specific” Jobsite Safety Manual.

B. In addition to a minimum of five (5) site visits by Greenhouse Manufacturer project management, Greenhouse Manufacturer personnel shall instruct owner on use of greenhouse, systems and equipment. Provide operation and maintenance manuals to owner.

C. Greenhouse Manufacturer shall supply the project with two (2) bound complete sets of Operation & Maintenance and one (1) electronic (pdf). Maintenance manuals shall include all equipment data and product literature including all periodic maintenance requirements.

4.6 WARRANTY

A. Greenhouse Manufacturer shall provide a one (1) year warranty on materials and workmanship from date of substantial completion. Any greenhouse warranty item within the warranty period shall be directed to and be the direct responsibility of the Greenhouse Manufacturer, including that of its material suppliers, vendors and subcontractors.

B. Written warranty conforming to the above paragraph to be submitted as part of the approval drawing submittal package


THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

PROJECT MANUAL FOR: CP170281 EAST CAMPUS PLANT...

Documents

Transcript of PROJECT MANUAL FOR: CP170281 EAST CAMPUS PLANT...